Maintain Engine Plan

FINISHED PLAN
S No.ＳＳ０９０
MAINTENANCE
APR. ‐7. 2011
LIST No. MB-3

MITSUI-MAN B&W
MC(MC-C) ENGINES
INSTRUCTION BOOK
VOLUME 2
MAINTENANCE
THIS BOOK MUST NOT, EITHER WHOLLY OR PARTLY, BE COPIED, REPRODUCED,
MADE PUBLIC OR ANY OTHER WAY MADE AVAILABLE TO A THIRD PARTY WITH-
OUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THIS EFFECT FROM MITSUI ENGINEERING &
SHIPBUILDING CO.,LTD.
S60MC-C Volume 2
Maintenance
C 4X-30844
INSTRUCTION BOOK FOR MAINTENANCE
In view of the continued development of our diesel engines,

these instruction books have been made to apply to our engines
of the type S60MC-C.
The purpose of these books in the first place to describe the
maintenance of the engine.
取　扱　説　明　書
保　守（解放）
ディーゼル機関のたゆまない進歩発展にかんがみ、本取扱説明書は
Ｓ６０ＭＣ－Ｃ型機関に対し、機関の解放について述べたものである。
C 4X-30844
Label of safety precaution
The following symbol marks are used in this instruction manual and for the safety precaution labels of engine
1. Safety sign, Signal word
It shows an imminent danger that no avoidance causes death and serious injury.
Danger It is not applied for items regarding damage of machinery.
It shows that no avoidance may cause death and serious injury.

Warning It is not applied for items regarding damage of machinery.
It shows that no avoidance may cause slight injury.

Caution It is applied for items regarding damage of machinery.
Notice It shows caution items to avoid the damage of machinery.
2. Symbols for safety marks
a) Caution mark b) Prohibition mark
General Caution General prohibition
Inframmable Fire No smoking
Explosive Explosion Naked flames prohibited
Correosive Corrosion No touching
Poisonous Poisoning c) Duty mark

Wear eye protector - Protective grass
Electric Electric shock
etc.
High temperture Skin burn Wear head protector - Helmet etc.
Wear hearing protector - Earplugs

Movable part Rolled in
etc.
Sharp Edge Cut Wear hand protector - Gloves etc.
External Wear foot protector - Safety shoes

High pressure fluid
injury etc.
Slipping d) The others
Falling Refer to separate paper
C 4X-30844
Cautions during Overhauling, Maintenance, Assembling
• Before overhauling, maintenance and assembling of engine, read this book, study the
structure and details of the work in question, and think out procedure beforehand and
decide work.
• The insufficient prior examination cases accidents and damages of engine.
Be sure to exchange the damaged parts as a result of inspection or wear parts which
comes up to the exchange limit.
• If it is difficult to take measurement or there is no spare parts on board (on site), contact
with our service division or service agency.
1. Caution items for safety • The floor of engine room and the
(1) Do not open the crankcase doors engine are slippery because of oil.
for more than 30 minutes until the During work, wipe off oil on the floor
engine is cooled down sufficiently and bottom of shoes. Specially,
after stop of the engine. There is a working at high position, be careful
risk of explosion by mixing oil mist for fallen down.
with fresh air in case the engine is (1) Before releasing some pipe sys-
overheated. tems, ensure that all valves are "
(1) There is a serious risk of severe CLOSE " position, and loosen the
personal injury if the engine is dearating plug slowly to release the
turned during overhauling and pressure.
inspection. There is a risk of blowout of high
• Before the work, ensure that control temperature oil and water, when
handle is on " STOP " position and releasing the joint of filters and
the valves of starting air line are pipes just after engine stop by
closed. remained pressure.
• When turning the engine, ensure (1) There is a risk of jumping out of
there is no contact of rotational part springs when releasing valves and
and no risk of surrounding persons. devices which springs are used for.
Give a signal to surrounding per- (1) Do not lift up the heavy loads by
sons. manpower. Use chain-block. Keep
• In case of overhauling or inspection away below crane with load.
of moving parts, make sure turning (1) Cut the power supply when dealing
gear is " ENGAGED " position. with electric parts.
(1) For lifting the engine components (1) Keep strictly below items when
during overhauling/assembling, dealing with liquid.
eye-bolts supplied from engine • fuel oil, lubrication oil=inflammable
builder (tool no. 13A20) must be Naked flames prohibited
used. • fresh water inhibition anti-freeze
(1) While at work, wear suitable protec- agent of fresh water battery liquid =
tors. (Glass, Helmet, Safety shoes inflammable, poisonous
Protective glass) Naked flames prohibited Do not
• Specially, it is very hot around drink. - Wash when adhesion.
exhaust pipe, indicator valve, turbo- • mercury (of thermometer) = poison-
charger and cylinder head during ous
running and immediately after stop- Do not drink. - Wash when adhe-
ping the engine. Wear the protec- sion.
tive glove while at work to avoid
skin burn.
C 4X-30844
2. Caution items in during overhauling,
maintenance and assembling
(2) Prepare beforehand tools and parts
for exchange.
Use specified tools, regular desig-
nated parts.
(2) Cover the open space with tapes or
clean cloths and so on. Do not for-
get to remove them when remount-
ing.
(2) Keep the overhauled parts in order,
to avoid injury and loss and to
assemble efficiently.
(2) Assemble the parts which have
stamps or scratch marks (ex. cylin-
der number or bearing number) in
original position. And make the
same marks on exchanged as the
same position of old parts.
(2) Remount protective cover and insu-
lating cover which was removed.
3. Confirmation items after overhauling,

maintenance and assembling
(3) Confirm that all bolts and nuts are
tightened and secured certainly.
Specially, take care of inner parts of
engine which can not be seen dur-
ing running.
(3) Confirm that there is no abnormality
of each engine parts, by turning
and priming.
(3) Confirm that the position of turning
gear is "DISENGAGED".
(3) Record in working diary the details
of work and exchanged parts.
4. Caution in case of turning the main

engine after standstill for a long
period.
The lubricating in each bearing shell

should be done certainly at least
five(5) minutes with running the L.O.
pump before turning the main engine
in order to prevent the damage on
bearing running surface from such as
scratches and/or seizures due to lack
of L.O..
C 4X-30844
SYMBOLS 　－　シンボルマーク
DISMANTLE, REMOVE, WITHDRAW

分解する。取り外す。取り去る。
MOUNT, CONNECT FIT

組み立てる。結合する。取り付ける。
UNSCREW, LOOSEN, TURN IN DIRECTION OF ARROW

ねじを緩める。緩める。矢印の方向に回す。
SCREW ON, TIGHTEN, TURN IN DIRECTION OF ARROW

ねじを締める。締める。矢印の方向に回す。
CONNECTION OF CRANE
クレーンにつなぐ。
LOOSEN - TIGHTEN WITH HYDRAULIC TOOLS

ハイドロリックツールによる締付け及び緩め。
PAY ATTENTION, CHECK

注意せよ。チェックせよ。
INDICATES DIRECTION, SHOWS DETAIL

方向指示。詳細を見よ。
CLOSE VALVE, COCK

閉弁する。
OPEN VALVE, COCK

開弁する。
LUBRICATE WITH PRESCRIBED LUBRICANT

指定の潤滑剤で潤滑する。
CLEAN
掃除する。
C 4X-30844
S60MC-C Cross Section Through Engine Plate 90001-0054M
When referring to this page, please quote Plate P90001 Edition 0054M Page 1 (2)
MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD.
C 4X-30844
Plate 90001-0054M Cross Section Through Engine S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Plate P90001 Edition 0054M
C 4X-30844
S60MC-C Checking and Maintenance Schedules 900-1
The Checking and Maintenance Schedules Design modifications may necessitate a revision
Checking and Maintenance Schedules
S60MC-C
900-1 0220
indicate the intervals at which it is deemed of the instructions, in which case the revised
appropriate to inspect the individual components instructions and changed overhauling intervals, if
of the engine and to carry out overhauls, if any, will apply and supersede those originally
necessary, based on the engine condition or on issued (see e.g our Service Letters).
time criteria.
In addition to the checking and overhauling
The stated Normal hours of service should only intervals stated in this schedule, please note that
be used as a guide, as differences in the actual the periodical survey requirements of the
service conditions, the quality of the fuel oil or classification society may require additional
lubricating oil, the treatment of cooling water, etc. checks and overhauls to be carried out.
will decisively influence the actual service For further information please refer to the
results, and thus the intervals between necessary classification society.
overhauling.
The procedures are divided into three categories:
Condition checking procedures marked under the heading Normal hours of service with a C,
deal with the service condition of a number of engine
components, and form the basis for estimating whether further
overhauling is necessary. In a number of cases the condition
checking procedures refer to Vol. 1 “OPERATION” of the
instruction book, in which more detailed descriptions and
working procedures can be found.
Condition-based overhauling are those procedures which under the heading Normal hours of
procedures service are marked with an O, and opposite which, under the
heading Overhaul to be based on procedure No. (column P),
a procedure number is stated.
This procedure number normally refers to one of the above

condition checking procedures which form the basis of the
overhaul. For this reason, the intervals stated are for guidance
only.
Time-based overhauling also marked with an O under the headings Normal hours of
procedures service or Based on observations, are the procedures where
an actual basis for estimation is lacking. It is recommended,
therefore, to carry out these procedures at the overhauling
intervals stated as a basis.
Where a symbol O or C is indicated in Based on observations

(column B), this is due to the fact that special service conditions
may make checking or overhauling necessary beyond the actual
standard schedules indicated.
When referring to this page, please quote Maintenance Schedules A90050 Edition 0220Mc Page 1 (10)
4X-30844
900-1 Checking and Maintenance Schedules S60MC-C
Page 2 (10) When referring to this page, please quote Maintenance Schedules A90050 Edition 0220Mc
MITSUI EINGINEERIN & SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD.
4X-30844
V : See Vol. 1 “Operation & Data” T : Pressure test only

A : Adjustment to be carried out
C : Check the condition H : Check new/overhauled parts after 500-1500 hours
M : See maker’s instructions B : Based on observations
O : Overhaul to be carried out P : Overhaul to be based on procedure No. or refer to
R : Parts to be replaced Normal hours of service (x1000)
No. Procedure H 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 24 32 B P
901 Cylinder Cover
-1 Cylinder Cover O
902 Piston with Rod and Stuffing Box

-1 Piston C C 901,V
Measuring of Piston rings O O
Piston complete O
-2 Piston Rod Stuffing Box C,O 902
903 Cylinder Liner and Cylinder Lubrication
-1 Cylinder Liner O 901

1000 hours and 2000 hours: C C
Inspection through scavenge ports
Measuring wear inside liner O O
-2 Cylinder Lubricators
Accumulator with filling up type C* C** O O 903

Accumulator with close type *** ((R (Accumulator) : every 5 years)) 903
904 Crosshead with Connecting Rod
-1 Crosshead Bearing C C O
-2 Crosshead O
-3 Reciprocating Parts O
-4 Crankpin Bearing C C O
-5 Connecting Rod O
905 Crankshaft, Thrust Bearing and Turning Gear

-1 Crankshaft Deflection C C V
-2 Main Bearing C C A,C,O 905,V
-3 Thrust Bearing C C
-4 Journal Bearing C C A,C,O 905,V
-5 Axial Vibration Damper C,O
* check inlet accumulator nitrogen pressure, ** check outlet accumulator nitrogen pressure, *** needless to check nitrogen pressure
4X-30844
4X-30844

No. Procedure H 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 24 32 B P
906 Mechanical Control Gear
-1 Chain C C V
-2 Chain Tightener C C A
New or overhauled chain to be checked/
retightened after 500, 1500 and 4000 hours
-3 Camshaft C C A,C
-4 Camshaft Bearings C,O
Camshaft Coupling, Fitted bolts C
907 Starting Air System
-1 Starting Air Distributor C C A
-2 Starting Air Valve C,O
Governor, change of oil O M
Functional check of overspeed device C M
Functional check of speed-setting system C M

(engine with bridge control system)
908 Exhaust Valve

-1 High-Pressure Pipe O
-2 Exhaust Valve
Conventional exhaust valve; O O

overhaul at intervals of 6000 hours
Nimonic exhaust valve; C O O

check new valves after 6000 hours
subsequently, overhaul at intervals of
12000 hours
-3 Exhaust Valve Actuator O
Actuator safety valve A,C
-4 Exhaust Valve Roller Guide C C O V
-5 Exhaust Valve Cam C
-7 Exhaust Valve Special Running C
4X-30844
4X-30844

No. Procedure H 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 24 32 B P
909 Fuel Oil System
-1 Fuel Pump Lead A,C V
-2 VIT System A
-3 Fuel Pump Cam A 909

-4 Fuel Pump O
-5 Fuel Pump Top Cover O
-6 Fuel Pump Barrel Assembly O
-7 Fuel Pump Suction Valve C,O
-8 Fuel Pump Puncture Valve C,O
-9 Fuel Pump Shock Absorber C O
-10 Lifting Gear for Roller Guide C,O
-11 Fuel Valve
Slide Type T C,O
Conical Type T C,O
Fuel Nozzle
Slide Type R
Conical Type R
-12 Spindle Guide
Slide Type C R
Conical Type C’ R
(C’;Checked by Authorized shop)
-13 Non return valve
Slide Type O
Conical Type O
-14 Fuel Oil High-Pressure Pipes O
-15 Fuel Pump Roller Guide C C C,O
4X-30844
4X-30844

No. Procedure H 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 24 32 B P
910 Turbocharger System
-1 Air Cooler C O V
-2 Non-Return Valve C O
-3 Auxiliary Blower O
-4 Butterfly Valves C O
-5 Turbocharger Turbine O V,M
-6 Water Mist Catcher C
911 Assembly of Large Parts
-1 Safety Valve C O
-2 Relief Valve O
Functional test of alarm system for thrust C C M

bearing and slow down /shut down system
Checking and adjustment of pressure gauge C M
Checking and adjustment of thermometers C M
Checking and adjustment of thermostats C M
Checking and adjustment of pressurestats C M
Checking and adjustment of turning gear M

switch
912 Assembly of Large Parts
-2 Holding Down and End chock Bolts (Epoxy) C C
-3 Stay Bolts C C
-5 Crankcase Oil Outlet C
913 General Tools

-1 Hydraulic Tools
-4 Standard Tightening Torques
-5 Torque Spanner
-6 Tightening Gauge
-7 Screws and Nuts
-11 Lubricating Procedures
4X-30844
4X-30844
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
PISTON WITH ROD AND STUFFING BOX
CYLINDER LINER AND

CYLINDER LUBRICATION
CROSSHEAD WITH CONNECTING ROD
CRANKSHAFT, THRUST BEARING

AND TURNING GEAR
MECANICAL CONTROL GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
ASSEMBLY OF LARGE PARTS
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C Cylinder Cover 101-1
Data
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION FOR SAFETY Standard Tools: See Section 913
Special Data
S60MC-C
05
101-1 Cylinder Cover
X Stopped engine Risk of high pressure oil
X Block the starting mechanism Risk of hot surface
X Shut off starting air supply Do not enter area when over head
lifting is being carried out
X Engage turning gear
Turning prohibited while at work
X Shut off cooling water (while some valves being opened)
X Shut off fuel oil
Shut off lubricating oil
X Lock turbocharger rotors
Data
Ref. Description Value Unit
D-1 Weight of exhaust valve stud 13 kg
D-2 Weight of cyl. cover

complete with valves 2790 kg
D-3 Weight of cooling jacket 73 kg
D-4 Exhaust valve studs

- screwing-in torque 450 Nm
D-5 Starting valve studs

D-6 Fuel valve studs

D-7 Hydraulic pressure

- dismantling 150-165 MPa
(1500-1650 bar)

- tightening 150 MPa
(1500 bar)
D-9 Check measurement 294±2 mm
When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet 101-1 Edition 05Mc Page 1 (2)
C 4X-36070
101-1 Cylinder Cover S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet 101-1 Edition 05Mc
C 4X-36070
S60MC-C Cylinder Cover 901-1.2
Dismantling
Cylinder Cover
S60MC-C
206
Dismantling
901-1.2
1.
1. Set blocking device A on the main starting
valve in the BLOCKED position.
Engage turning gear B.
Close fuel oil inlet valve C.
Close cooling water inlet valve D.
Close cooling water outlet valves E and F.
Open cooling water drain cocks G and H.
Shut off the control air and safety air sup-

ply. Vent the manoeuvring system through
the ball valve.
Also shut off the air supply on the reduction

unit for the hydraulic/pneumatic exhaust
valve, and vent the system.
HN901-1.2 206 01
2. Remove the cooling water outlet pipe from

the exhaust valve.
Remove the screws which fasten the cool-

ing water outlet pipe to the block on the cyl-
inder cover. 2.
Dismount the fuel oil high-pressure pipes.

See Procedure 909-14.2.
Dismount the control air pipe from the start-

ing valve.
Remove the screws which fasten the start-

ing air inlet pipe to the block on the cylinder
cover.
HN901-1.2 206 02
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 901-1.2 Edition 206Mh Page 1 (10)
4X-36070
901-1.2 Cylinder Cover S60MC-C
Dismantling
3. 3. Dismount the hydraulic high-pressure pipe,

see Procedure 908-1.2.
Dismount the drain oil pipe between the ex-

haust valve and the hydraulic activator, the
air pipe for the pneumatic exhaust valve.
4. Remove the protective jacket enclosing the

intermediate pipe between the exhaust re-
ceiver and the exhaust valve.
Dismount the screws in the flange between

the intermediate pipe and the exhaust re-
HN901-1.2 206 03 L0b
ceiver. The four lowermost screws need not

be dismantled, just loosened.
Remove the protective caps from the cylin-

der cover nuts.
4.
5. Place eight spacer rings over the nuts, and
screw the eight hydraulic jacks onto the
studs.
Connect the high-pressure pump to the

jacks by means of the distributor block and
the high-pressure hoses.
Using the vent screws of the hydraulic nuts,

vent the system and increase the pressure
as stated in Data.
For operation of the hydraulic tools, see
Chapter 913.
HN901-1.2 206 04
Loosen the nuts by applying the tommy bar

through the slots in the spacer rings.
5. Relieve the system of pressure.

D-7 Disconnect the high-pressure hoses from
the jacks.
Remove the hydraulic jacks and spacer

rings, and unscrew the nuts.
Mount the eye bolt in the lifting tool on top

of the exhaust valve.
HN901-1.2 206 05 L0c
Page 2 (10) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 901-1.2 Edition 206Mh
4X-36070
Dismantling
6. Assemble the cylinder cover support tool on 6.

the solid floor at uppermost platform, for in-
stance, the place of heavy engine spare
parts.
Hook the engine room crane on to the lifting

attachment on top of the exhaust valve.
Liftaway the cylinder cover complete and

place it on the support tool, in this case the
chain of crane is to be kept with slightly
tightened.
MN901-1.2 216 06
Note!
For examination/cleaning of underside or

the inside of cylinder cover, the cylinder
cover support tool must be used. 7.
The said support tool should only be D-2
used when the ship is in port.
7. It the cylinder cover is to be overhauled,it

is recommended instead to land it on a cou-
ple of wooden planks.
8. Remove and discard the seal ring between

cylinder cover and cylinder liner.
Remove and discard the O-ring fitted on the

HN901-1.2 206 06 L0b
cylinder cover studs.
8.
NA901-1.2 209 07 L0b
4X-36070
Overhaul
Overhaul
901-1.3
1.
D-1 1. Dismount all valves and pipes on the cylin-
der cover. See Procedure 907-2.2, 908-2.2
and 909-11.2.
Dismount the starting air inlet block and the

cooling water outlet block from the exhaust
side of the cylinder cover.
Dismount all studs on the top of the cylinder

cover.
2. Unscrew the four screws which secure the

cooling jacket to the cylinder cover.
HN901-1.3 206 01
Lift the cylinder cover free of the cooling

jacket and land it on a couple of planks.
If the cooling jacket sticks, use dismantling

2. screws to force the jacket/cover apart.
3. Remove and discard the O-rings from the

cover, and carefully clean the cooling jacket
and the cylinder cover.
4. Provide the cylinder cover with new O-

rings, well lubricated with oil.
D-3
Lift the cylinder cover and guide the jacket/
cover into position, using the guide pin as
reference (camshaft side).
Mount and tighten the screws for the cool-

HN901-1.3 206 02
ing jacket.
3.
HN901-1.3 206 04
4X-36070
Overhaul
5. Recondition the valve bores as follows: 5.
Fuel valve bore
6. The tool consists of a common spindle with

handle, and of a guide, a carbon cutter, a
seating face cutter, and a grinding mandrel.
Clean the fuel valve bores, using the car-

bon cutter. If required, recondition the fuel
valve seating with the appropriate cutter.
Grind the seating with the grinding mandrel
HN901-1.3 206 05
and a grinding compound (e.g. Carborun-
dum No. 200).
After the milling/grinding, clean the bore

and seating carefully, and check that the
seating is not damaged. 6.
Exhaust valve bore
7. The tool consists of a spindle with handle

and a grinding disc.
After cleaning the valve bore and seating,

grind the seating with the grinding disc and
a grinding compound (e.g. Carborundum
No. 200).
After the grinding, clean the bore and seat-

ing carefully, and check that the seating is
not damaged.
GN901-1.3 203 06
7.
GN901-1.3 203 07
4X-36070
Overhaul
8. Starting valve bore
8. The tool consists of a guide, a cutter, and

a grinding disc.
Recondition the starting valve bore and

seating in the same way as described for
the fuel valve bore.
When replacing valves on a cylinder cover

that is mounted on the engine, recondition
the valve bores/seating in the same way as
described here, but without dismounting the
studs.
9. Clean the bores for safety valve/indicator

valve.
HN901-1.3 206 08
9.
HN901-1.3 206 09
4X-36070
Overhaul
10. Lubricate the threads with ‘Never Seize’ or 10. D-4

Molybdenum Disulphide (MoS 2) and mount
the valve studs.
Tighten up the studs in accordance with the D-6

screwing-in torque stated on the data
sheet. Make sure that the fuel valve studs
are correctly mounted, D-9 (see illustra-
tion). D-5
Notice!
Be careful, if the stud for a fuel valve are

mis-assembled, the direction of injection
of fuel is altered, resulting in serlous
D-9
damage.
Fill up the grooves between the valve studs

and the bores for the valve studs with per-
matex to prevent water or oil from entering
HN901-1.3 206 10 L0a
the bores during operation of the engine.
Provide the water connection flanges with

new gaskets, and keep the cylinder cover
ready for replacement.
11.
Always fit new or overhauled valves before
a cylinder cover is mounted on the engine.
11. Clean the starting air inlet block and the

cooling water outlet block.
Mount the blocks and new packings on the

cylinder cover.
HN901-1.3 206 11
4X-36070
Mounting
Mounting
901-1.4
1. 1. Check that the liner surface is clean.

D-2 Place a new sealing ring on top of the cyl-
inder liner.
Note!
Do NOT apply any kind of lubricant to the

sealing faces or the sealing ring.
2. Lift the cylinder cover by means of the

crane and carefully wipe the contact sur-
face which faces the cylinder liner, too.
Provide the cooling water connecting pipes

with new O-rings and lubricate them with
grease or soft soap.
Lower the cover carefully into position.
During the landing, carefully check that the

cooling water connecting pipes engage cor-
HN901-1.4 206 01
rectly with the holes in the cooling jacket.
2.
HN901-1.4 206 02
4X-36070
Mounting
3. After mounting the cylinder cover in place, 3.

fit the O-ring for centering lubricated with D-8
grease to make the clearance between the
bore and stud to avoid both the contact.
The O-ring shall be screwed down with the
cover nut and placed into space (See the
sketch 3). Check no clearance between
cover nut and upper surface of cylinder
cover by feeler gauge after tightening the
cover nut.
Note!
HN901-1.2 206 05 L0b

The O-ring shall be replaced with new
one every time by above process when
executing the overhaul of cylinder cover.
Place eight spacer rings, one around each

nut, and mount the eight hydraulic jacks on 4.
the studs.
the high-pressure hoses.
Use the vent screws of the hydraulic nuts to
vent the system, and then increase the
pressure as stated in Data.
Chapter 913.
Tighten the nuts by applying the tommy bar
through the slots in the spacer rings.
HN901-1.4 206 04
Relieve the system of pressure.

Finally, remove the hydraulic jacks and
spacer rings from the nuts.
4. Mount the protective caps on the cylinder
cover studs.
Align the intermediate pipe so that the
holes in the flange of the intermediate pipe
are in line with the threaded holes in the ex-
haust valve.
Mount the screws of the flange between the
intermediate pipe and the exhaust receiver.
Note!
Lubricate the screws with ‘Never Seize’

or Molybdenum Disulphide (MoS 2) before
mounting.
4X-36070
Mounting
5. 5. Mount the insulating jacket around the in-

termediate pipe.
6. Mount the return oil pipe and the air pipe for
pneumatic closing of the exhaust valve.
Mount the high-pressure pipe for the hy-

draulic valve gear.
7. Mount the control air pipe for the starting

valve. Mount the screws which fasten the
starting air inlet pipe to the block on the cyl-
HN901-1.4 206 05
inder cover.
Mount the cooling water outlet pipe on the

exhaust valve. Mount the screws which fas-
ten the cooling water outlet pipe to the
6. block on the cylinder cover.
Using a crowfoot wrench and torque span-

ner, mount the fuel oil high-pressure pipes.
8. Connect the outlet pipe from the return oil

pipe on the fuel valves.
Shut the drain valves and open the cooling

water inlet. After venting the cylinder sec-
tion, shut the vent cocks and open the
cooling water outlet valve.
HN901-1.4 206 06 L0b
Open the fuel oil, lubricating oil and air sup-

plies to the alarm system.
7. Caution!
The air supply to the exhaust valve must

always be connected before turning on
the oil supply to the exhaust valve actua-
tor.
This is very important, because other-

wise the valve will open more than
intended.
HN901-1.4 206 07
4X-36070
S60MC-C Cylinder Cover Panel Plate 90151-176M
When referring to this page, please quote Plate 90151 Edition 176M Page 1 (6)
C 4X-36070
Plate 90151-176M Cylinder Cover Panel S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
010 Tool panel *) (P901)
022 Name plate *) (P901)
046 Grinding tool for exhaust valve seat 01A21
058 Milling and grinding tool for 01A24
fuel valve seat
060 Milling and grinding tool for 01A31
starting valve seat
071 Dismantling tool for fuel valve 01A46
083 Handle for milling and grinding tool 01A25
095 Grinding ring for starting valve 07A21
105 Grinding handle for starting valve 07A22
117 Pressure tester 11A71
010- Tool panel, complete -

117 with tools *)
*) Optional extras
Page 2 (6) When referring to this page, please quote Plate 90151 Edition 176M
C 4X-36070
S60MC-C Cylinder Cover - Tools Plate 90161-88M
C 4X-36070
Plate 90161-88M Cylinder Cover - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
015 Hydraulic jack 01A01
027 O-ring with back-up ring 01A03
039 O-ring with back-up ring 01A03
052 Spacer ring for cylinder cover 01A02
065 Stud setter for exhaust valve stud 01A89
088 Hydraulic tools for cylinder cover -
159 Lifting chains for cylinder cover 01A12
218 Stud setter for cylinder cover stud 01A87
M1 Cover for valve bore/ 01A52
stuffing box hole
C 4X-36070
S60MC-C Cylinder Cover - Support Tool Plate 90163-0003M
016
x4 x4
When referring to this page, please quote Plate 90163Edition 0003M Page 5 (6)
C 4X-36070
Plate 90163-0003M Cylinder Cover - Support Tool S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
016 Cylinder cover rack 01A55
C 4X-36070
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C Piston 102-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0025
102-1 Piston
X Stopped engine Do not enter area when over head

X Block the starting mechanism
X Shut off starting air supply
X Shut off cooling water
X Shut off fuel oil
X Shut off lubrication oil
Lock turbocharger rotors
Data
D-1 Radial width:

- new piston ring 20 mm
- worn piston ring 17 mm
D-2 Maximum vertical height:
- groove from nominal height:
- 14 mm ring No. 1 14.7 mm
- 11 mm ring No. 2, 3 and 4 11.7 mm
D-3 Max. permissible burn-away:
- standard piston top 20 mm
- inconel piston top 8 mm
D-4 Nominal height:
- ring groove No. 1 14 mm
- ring groove No. 2, 3 and 4 11 mm
- piston ring No. 1 14 mm
- piston ring No. 2 ,3 and 4 11 mm
D-5 Minimum ring gap 4 mm
D-6 Vertical clearance 0.40-0.45 mm
D-7 Piston complete 1555 kg
D-8 Piston crown 350 kg
D-9 Piston skirt 93 kg
D-10 Piston skirt
- tightening torque 190 Nm
D-11 Piston cooling pipe 43 kg
D-12 Cooling pipe
D-13 Piston rod 1018 kg
D-14 Piston crown/rod
D-15 Test pressure 0.7 MPa
(7 bar)
D-16 Cyl. cover with exhaust valve 2460 kg
D-18 Tightening torque of piston 590 Nm
or tightening angle 60 °
D-19 Stuffing box
When referring to this page, please quote Data D10201 Edition 0025Mb Page 1 (2)
4X-10285
102-1 Piston S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data D10201 Edition 0025Mb
4X-10285
S60MC-C Piston 902-1.1
Checking
Piston
S60MC-C
0224
Checking
902-1.1
1.
Scavenge port inspection
To detect possible leakages from the piston or

cylinder cover, keep the cooling water and
cooling oil circulating during the scavenge port
inspection.
1. Remove the inspection covers on the

camshaft side of the cylinder frame.
Note!
GN902-1.1 204 01
The scavenge port inspection can also
be carried out from within the scavenge
air receiver.
Clean the openings. 2.
Begin the inspection at the cylinder whose

piston is nearest BDC.
2. With the piston in BDC, inspect the piston

crown and the cylinder wall.
Note down the results.

See Vol. 1, OPERATION, Chapter 707.
3. Turn the engine. While the piston is passing

the scavenge air ports, inspect the piston
rings, the ringlands and the piston skirt.
GN902-1.1 204 02 L0a
Check the movability and the tension of the

piston rings, by pressing against them with
a wooden stick.

3.
GN902-1.1 204 03
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90201 Edition 0224Mc Page 1 (19)
4X-10285
902-1.1 Piston S60MC-C
Checking
4. 4. After turning the piston upwards, past the

scavenge air ports, inspect the piston rod
and the lower part of the cylinder wall.
5. Re-mount the inspection covers on the

cylinder frame. If necessary, replace the
gaskets.
Piston rings and piston crown
6. Remove the piston from the cylinder and

GN902-1.1 204 04 L0a
place it on the piston support.

6.
D-7
GN902-1.1 204 06 L0a
Page 2 (19) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90201 Edition 0224Mc
4X-10285
Checking
7. Take off the piston rings by means of the 7.

ring expander.
Clean and inspect the rings.
8. Measure and record the radial width and

the height of the rings.
See Vol. 1, OPERATION, Chapter 707.
Worn rings must be replaced if the radial

width is less than stated in Data.
9. Piston rings with milled pressure relief

grooves must be replaced if the radial
depth of the grooves has worn down to less
than 1.8 mm.
JG902-3.0 98 05
8.
D-1
New
GN902-1.1 204 08
D-1
Worn
9.
Min. 1.8 mm
GN902-1.1 204 09 L0a
4X-10285
Checking
10. 10. Clean the ring grooves and check them for
burn marks or other deformation.
D-2
Measure the ring grooves with a caliper
gauge.
Clearance in piston ring grooves:
The maximum vertical height in a worn ring

groove must not exceed the value stated in
Data.
The groove is also worn out if there is no

chromium layer.
KM902-3.0 47 05
11. The nominal heights of ring grooves of a

new piston crown or new piston rings are as
stated in Data.
11.
12. Clean the piston crown and check the burn-
away by means of the template.
For maximum permissible burn-away value,
see Data.
D-4
Check the burn-away on the whole circum-
ference of the piston crown.
Regarding the maximum permissible burn-

away of piston top with welded-on layer of
Inconel, see Data.
GN902-1.1 204 11
12.
D-3
KC902-3.0 83 04
4X-10285
Checking
13. Before mounting a new piston ring, 13.

measure the piston ring gap.
When measuring, insert the piston ring in

either a new cylinder liner or in the bottom
of a used cylinder (below the ring travel
zone).
For minimum ring gap, see Data.

D-5
14. Fit the piston rings (alternately right-hand
and left-hand cuts with the ring gaps
staggered 180° and with the TOP mark
GN902-1.1 204 13
upwards), using the ring expander.
The ring expander prevents unintended

deformation of the rings.
14.
15. Check the vertical clearance between the
new piston ring and the new or
reconditioned ring groove with a feeler
gauge. See Data.
JG902-3.0 98 05
15.
D-6
KM902-3.0 47 06
4X-10285
Dismantling
Dismantling
902-1.2
1. 1. Turn the crosshead down far enough to

give access to the piston rod stuffing box,
the tightening screws for the piston rod, and
to the telescopic pipe.
2. Release the stuffing box by removing the

innermost screws from the stuffing box
flange.
Note!
Do NOT remove the outermost screws

from the flange.
3. Remove the screws from the piston rod.

GN902-1.2 204 01
2.
GN902-1.2 204 02
3.
GN902-1.2 204 03 L0a
4X-10285
Dismantling
4. Mount the two distance pieces on the 4.

piston rod foot to protect the lower scraper
ring and to guide the stuffing box.
5. Dismount the cylinder cover.

GN902-1.2 204 04 L0a

Remove the piston cleaning ring from the
cylinder liner. See Procedure 901-1.1.
Carefully smooth out any wear ridges at the

top of the cylinder liner by using a hand
grinder.
See Procedure 903-1.2. 5.
6. Turn the crosshead to TDC, while checking

that the guide pins of the distance pieces
enter the holes in the stuffing box.
D-16
HN902-1.2 207 05
6.
GN902-1.2 204 06
4X-10285
Dismantling
7. 7. The top of the piston is now free of the

cylinder liner.
(A) If necessary, remove one or two cylinder

cover studs, using a stud setter.
Clean the lifting groove of the piston crown

and mount the lifting tool in such a manner
that the two ‘fixed’ claws of the tool fit into
the lifting groove of the piston.
Fit the third, adjustable, claw of the tool to

the lifting groove and tighten it up against
GN902-1.2 204 07 L0c
the stop of the tool.
Note!
8. The bolt (A), which is provided specially
for the purpose of tightening the remov-
able claw, must be firmly tightened.
8. Place the two halves of the support around

one of the openings in the platform.
Lift the piston out of the cylinder and lower

D-7 the piston rod foot and stuffing box through
the opening in the platform.
Place the two halves of the support around

the piston rod and secure the two halves
with screws.
9. Place a cover over the opening for the

GN902-1.2 204 08 L0a
piston rod stuffing box in the bottom of the

cylinder unit.
Clean, measure and recondition the

cylinder liner.
9. See Procedure 903-2.1.
GN902-1.2 204 09 L0a
or
4X-10285
Dismantling
10. Turn the crosshead down far enough to 10.

mount the protective cover on the cross-
head bearing cap.
The protective rubber cover should remain

in place to protect the crosshead bearing
journal from impurities until the piston is re-
mounted.
Low lifting height
If the space conditions above the engine make

it impossible to remove the piston in the normal
GN902-1.2 204 10 L0a

way, the piston can be removed as follows:
11. Turn the piston to TDC.
Remove the clamp from the tilting tool and

place it on the supporting tools by means of 11.
the engine room crane and crossbar.
Remove the crossbar.

MN902-1.2 218 11 L0a
4X-10285
Dismantling
12. 12. Mount the lifting tool for piston.
Lift the piston high enough to give ample

room over the tilting tool.
Mount the tilting tool around the piston rod

and lower the piston so that the distance
pieces of the tilting tool are in contact with
the piston.
Fasten the clamp to the tilting tool.
13. Lift the piston to the maximum crane height.

Run the crane athwartship and, at the same
time, tilt the piston.
Keep the piston rod clear of the cylinder

liner and studs while carrying out the tilting.
When space conditions permit, straighten

up the piston and lead it over to the cut-out
in the platform for overhauling the piston.
MN902-1.2 218 12 L0a
When the piston is at a suitable height

above the platform cut-out, position the
piston support around the piston rod and
clamp.
13.
Now lower the piston while guiding the
support to the platform cut-out.
After landing the piston and ensuring that it

rests correctly on the support, remove the
tilting tool.
Note!
On engines with extremely low lifting

height, use the engine room double-jib
crane instead of the transverse piece.
GN902-1.2 204 13 L0b
4X-10285
Overhaul
Overhaul
902-1.3
1.
1. Position new O-rings on the platform
around the piston overhaul cut-out.
D-7
2. Ease the piston down so that the stuffing
box is below the floor.
Lift the O-rings and assemble the two

halves of the piston support around the
piston rod.
Position the O-rings on the piston support.
3. Dismount the locking wire and screw up the
GN902-1.3 204 01 L0c

support screws of the piston support to a
position just below the piston skirt.
Remove the piston skirt screws.
GN902-1.3 204 02 L0a 2.
3.
GN902-1.3 204 03 L0a
4X-10285
Overhaul
4. 4. Screw the four screws of the support

downwards until the skirt rests on the
support.
If the skirt will not budge, free it by means

of two dismantling screws.
5. Dismount the locking wire and the

innermost screws between the rod and the
piston crown.
Lift away the piston crown.

GN902-1.3 204 04 L0a
6. Dismount the screws of the cooling oil pipe

flange.
Mount the eye bolts and lift out the cooling

oil pipe.
5.
D-8
GN902-1.3 204 05 L0a
6.
D-11
D-12
GN902-1.3 204 06
4X-10285
Overhaul
Alternatively, the piston can be dismantled 7.

in the following way:
Note!
Tilting of the piston must only take place

with the piston rod stuffing box mounted
on the piston rod.
7. While the complete piston is hanging from

the lifting tool, mount the collar round the
piston rod so that the distance pieces of the
collar obtain contact with the piston.
Lower the piston so that the collar rests on

the platform.
Remove the lifting tools from the top of the

piston crown.
Hook the engine room crane on to the lifting

crossbar and hook the chains of the lifting
crossbar on to the shackles of the collar.
8. Lift the piston, tilt it to the horizontal

GN902-1.3 204 07 L0a
position, and land it in this position on a

couple of wooden blocks. Remove the
lifting crossbar and chains from the collar.
9. Attach the lifting tool to the bottom of the

piston rod foot. Hook the crane on to the 8.
lifting tool. D-7
Lift the foot of the piston rod clear of the
wooden block. Move the piston rod stuffing
GN902-1.3 204 08
box up the piston rod until it is in contact

with the collar. Remove the two distance
pieces from the piston rod foot.
Note! 9.
During the lift, follow with the crane to

keep the crane positioned vertically
above the foot of the piston rod.
Keep lifting until the piston rod is in a

GN902-1.3 204 09
vertical position.
4X-10285
Overhaul
10. 10. Place the piston in an upright position with

the piston crown resting on wooden blocks.
Dismount the locking wire and the

innermost screws between the rod and the
piston crown. Lift the piston rod away and
land it in a horizontal position on a couple
of wooden blocks.
11. Remove the locking wire and the screws in

the skirt and mount two eye bolts in the
holes intended for dismantling screws. Lift
the skirt and land it on a couple of planks.
GN902-1.3 204 10
12. Thoroughly clean and inspect all parts of

the piston.
Regarding check of the piston crown, see
Procedure 902-1.1.
11.
Replace all sealing rings of the piston. All
the new sealing rings must be coated with
lubricating oil before the piston is
assembled.
Coat all screws with Molybdenum Disul-

phide (MoS2).
D-9
Assemble the piston in the reverse order to
disassembly. Use the guide screw to
ensure the correct positioning of the piston
rod in relation to the piston crown.
GN902-1.3 204 11
Tighten all the screws diagonally to the

torque stated in Data.
12.
D-14
D-10
GN902-1.3 204 12 L0a
4X-10285
Overhaul
13. Lock all the screws with locking wire. 13.
Mount the locking wire in such a way that

the wire is tightened if one of the screws
works loose.
See Procedure 913-7.
14. Fill the piston and piston rod with

lubricating oil.
Mount the pressure-testing tool around the

base of the piston rod.
GN902-1.3 204 13
Pressure-test the piston at the pressure
stated on the data sheet.
Check the contact surfaces of the piston

and the sealing rings for tightness.
14.
Check that there are no cracks in the piston
crown.
D-15
GN902-1.3 204 14 L0d
4X-10285
Mounting
Mounting
902-1.4
2. 1. Check the piston rings and piston crown in

accordance with Procedure 902-1.1.
D-7 Coat the piston rings, piston rod and

cylinder liner with lubricating oil.
2. Mount the lifting tool on the piston crown.
3. Ensure that the stuffing box is correctly

positioned over the guide pins in the
distance pieces mounted on the piston rod
foot.
Coat the O-rings of the stuffing box with oil.
4. Remove the protective cover from the

crosshead.
GN902-1.1 204 06 L0a
3.
GN902-1.4 204 03 L0a
4.
GN902-1.2 204 10 L0a
4X-10285
Mounting
5. Remove the cover from the piston rod 5.

stuffing box opening in the bottom of the
cylinder unit.
6. Turn the crosshead to a position 45° from

TDC.
Mount the guide ring for piston rings on the

cylinder liner.
7. Lower the piston into the cylinder liner - or

while guiding the piston rod foot through the
cut-out in the stuffing box flange - until the
GN902-1.2 204 09 L0a

piston rings are inside the liner,
corresponding to the lifting tool lacking
about 30 mm in landing on the guide ring.
GN902-1.4 204 06 L0e 6.
7.
GN902-1.4 204 07 L0c
4X-10285
Mounting
8. 8. Turn the crosshead to TDC while checking

that the guide ring of the crosshead enters
the centre hole in the piston rod.
9. After turning the piston fully to TDC,

unscrew the adjustable claw of the lifting
tool and pull the lifting tool free of the lifting
groove in the piston
Remove the lifting tool and the guide ring

for piston rings.
Turn the crosshead with the piston rod and

GN902-1.4 204 08 L0a
the telescopic pipe down far enough to

permit tightening of the piston rod screws.
10. Remove the distance pieces from the

piston rod foot.
9.
Mount and tighten the piston rod screws.
See Data.
Lock the screws with locking wire.

the wire is tightened if one of the screws
works loose.
GN902-1.4 204 09 L0e
10.
D-18
GN902-1.2 204 03 L0a
4X-10285
Mounting
11. Tighten down the piston rod stuffing box by 11.

means of the screws through the inner
holes in the stuffing box flange. See Data.
12. If one or more cylinder cover studs have D-19

been removed during the dismantling of the
piston, discard the old O-rings and mount
new ones on the cylinder cover studs.
Mount the studs in the cylinder frame, using

the stud setter.
GN902-1.2 204 02
Note!
Screw the stud down to contact, then

either unscrew the stud approx 45°-90°,
or check distance “Y” = 2-3 mm. See the
sketch. 12.
Carefully clean the surfaces around the

base of the mounted studs and refill the
roots properly with Permatex 3.
Mount the piston cleaning ring on the cylin-

der liner. “Y”
OBS!
GN902-1.4 204 12 L0d
Check that TOP, CAM SIDE mark on the

ring face upwards and TOP, CAM SIDE
mark set the camshaft side when mount-
ing.
13.
13. Smear the piston rod with molybdenum
disulphide, and turn the crankshaft a couple
of revolutions.
Mount the cylinder cover. D-16

14. Start the engine and keep it running for

about 15 minutes at a number of revolu-
tions corresponding to very slow.
Then stop the engine and inspect the piston

rod and stuffing box.
HN902-1.2 207 05
4X-10285
S60MC-C Piston Rod Stuffing Box 102-2
Data
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Standard Tools: See Section 913

Special Data
S60MC-C
0023
102-2 Piston Rod Stuffing Box
X Stopped engine
X Shut off fuel oil
X Shut off lubrication oil
Data
D-1 Stuffing box complete 88 kg

D-2 Stuffing box half 35 kg
D-3 Stuffing box halves
- tightening torque
Upper / Lower bolt 80 Nm
Middle reamer bolt 25 Nm
D-4 Stuffing box flanges
D-5 Inner screws
D-6 Uppermost rings
- vertical clearance 0.085-0.158 mm
D-7 Middle rings
D-8 Lowermost rings
D-9 Uppermost ring (upper)
- ring-end clearances 3 x 4.5 mm
D-10 Middle rings
- ring-end clearances 3 x 8 mm
D-11 Lowermost rings
- ring-end clearances 3 x 3 mm
D-12 Check length for the uppermost
scraper ring spring:
- F0 = 0 N.......................... L0 = 779 mm
- F1 = 103.4 ± 10.3 N........ L1 = 840.5 mm
D-13 Check length for the seal ring
springs:
- F0 = 0 N.......................... L0 = 810 mm
- F1 = 115.2 ± 11.5 N........ L1 = 885 mm
D-14 Check length for the scraper
ring springs:
- F0 = 0 N.......................... L0 = 606 mm
- F1 = 100 ± 7 N................ L1 = 780 mm
- F2 = 136 ± 10 N.............. L2 = 844 mm
When referring to this page, please quote Data D10202 Edition 0023Mb Page 1 (2)
4X-10285
102-2 Piston Rod Stuffing Box S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data D10202 Edition 0023Mb
4X-10285
S60MC-C Piston Rod Stuffing Box 902-2.1
Checking
Piston Rod Stuffing Box
S60MC-C
0213
Checking
902-2.1
1. After the piston rod stuffing box has been 1.

dismantled, checkthe following clearances: D-6 D-7
Uppermost scraper ring and seal rings

D-8
A
Vertical clearance between seal ring
section and groove. (D-6)
B
Clearance at ring ends (scraper ring). UPPER SIDE
Total clearance (scraper ring). (D-9)

D
D-8 CHAMFER
Clearance at ring ends (seal rings). LAMELLA
Total clearance (seal rings). (D-10)
Middle seal rings B C

UPPER SIDE
CHAMFER
8
Vertical clearance between seal ring and A C,D
8
groove. (D-7) D-10
3
LAMELLA
4.5
4 .5
8
Clearance at ring ends. D-9 D-11
3
Total clearance. (D-10) 3
4 .5
2210213M01
Lowermost scraper rings
Caution!
2.
No drain groove at the lower of upper- D-12
most scraper ring surface just below the
seal rings and fitting direction of lamella
is up side down in comparison with other
ones.
Vertical clearances between seal ring and

groove. (D-8) D-13
Clearance at ring ends.
Total clearance. (D-11)
The ring clearances stated in Data apply to

new rings.
As a general guide, it is recommended - D-14

depending on the overhauling intervals and
one’s own experience - to replace seal
rings and scraper rings when the specified
clearance values D-9, D-10 and D-11 has
been halved.
GN902-2.1 203 02 L0b
2. Check the length of the springs at different

loads. Adjust the loads to achieve the
lengths stated in Data.
If the loads necessary are outside the limits

stated in Data, the springs must be discard-
ed.
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90202 Edition 0213Mb Page 1 (9)
4X-10285
902-2.2 Piston Rod Stuffing Box S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
902-2.2
1. If, in the period between piston overhauls, it

becomes necessary to inspect the piston rod
stuffing box, proceed as follows:
1. Turn the crankthrow to about 90° from TDC.
Mount the protecting cover around the

piston rod to protect the crosshead bearing
from impurities.
2. Remove the drain oil pipe and all innermost

screws and all outer screws except for two
screws placed diametrically opposite in the
stuffing box flange, longitudinally to the
engine.
3. Mount the worktable round the piston rod

GN902-2.2 203 01 L0a
so that the two screws can be loosened

through the holes.
2.
GN902-2.2 203 02 L0a
3.
GN902-2.2 203 03 L0a
Page 2 (9) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90202 Edition 0213Mb
4X-10285
Dismantling
4. Remove the two long screws from the 4.

worktable.
Mount them in the stuffing box through the

holes in the worktable.
Remove the remaining two screws from the

stuffing box.
5. Turn the piston to BDC, thereby withdraw-

ing the stuffing box from the cylinder frame
bottom.
GN902-2.2 204 04 L0a

Remove the two long dismantling screws
from the stuffing box and mount them in the
worktable.
6. By means of the four short screws in the

worktable, press the stuffing box out of the 5.
flange.
For overhauling the stuffing box, see
Procedure 902-2.3.
GN902-2.2 203 05 L0a
6.
GN902-2.2 204 06 L0d
4X-10285
Overhaul
Overhaul
902-2.3
Outside the engine
Normally, overhaul of the piston rod stuffing

box is carried out by routine methods in
connection with dismantling (pulling) of the
pistons.
During such overhauls the piston rests on a

support placed over one of the cut-outs in the
top platform.
Work on the stuffing box is then carried out

from the platform below.
GM902-2.3 20700L0b
1. Mount two eye bolts in the stuffing box

flange, and hook on two tackles.
Then lift the stuffing box a little up the

1. piston rod, and mount the worktable round
D-1 the piston rod at a suitable working height.
Land the stuffing box on the worktable, and

remove the tackles and screws.
2. Remove the O-ring of the stuffing box. If the

O-ring is intact and is to be used again,
move it up the piston rod and secure it in
this position, for example with tape.
Remove the nuts from the stuffing box

assembling bolts.
GN902-2.3 203 01 L0b
2.
GN902-2.3 203 02 L0b
4X-10285
Overhaul
3. Take out the six bolts, and pull away one 3.

stuffing box half.
Mount two eye bolts on the stuffing box half

and remove it from the worktable. D-2
4. Using a feeler gauge, measure the vertical
clearance of the rings.
5. Remove the remaining stuffing box half and

press all seal rings and scraper rings down
against the worktable.
HC902-5.1 98 04 L0a
6. Measure the clearance D-9, D-10, D-11
between the ring segments to determine
whether replacement is necessary.
Dismantle and stack the rings in the same

7. D-12
order as when fitted in the stuffing box.
Carefully clean all the ring segments.
Inspect and assess the surface quality of D-13

the seal rings. If their sliding surfaces have
scratches or marks, replace the rings.
7. Check the lengths of the springs.

See Procedure 902-2.1. D-14
GN902-2.1 203 02 L0b
8. Inspect the surface of the piston rod. If

small longitudinal scratches have occurred
(caused by poorly adapted stuffing box
rings), smooth the piston rod surface
carefully with a fine grained carborundum
stone. In the case of coarse scratches, it 8.
may prove necessary to machine-grind the
surface in a workshop.
9. Clean the halves of the stuffing box

housing.
GN902-2.3 203 08
4X-10285
Overhaul
10. 10. Lubricate the piston rod (in the area where
all the ring units in the stuffing box will be
positioned) with molybdenum disulphide
x1
(MoS 2).
02B58 Assemble all the stuffing box ring units

round the piston rod, on the worktable, in
the following way:
x2 Assemble the four scraper ring units (con-

sisting of 3 part).
Place the segments (3 part) for the scraper
HM902-2.4 204 01L0e
ring unit on the working table.
x4
Note!
Be careful not to set the lamellas for

11.
scraper rings up side down.
See the sketch in 902-2.1-1.
Place the spring round the segments and,

by means of two hooks, pull both spring
ends, and assemble the spring.
Repeat this procedure for the remaining

scraper rings.
On top of the scraper ring unit, assemble

the two seal ring units (consisting of under
GN902-2.3 203 11 L0b
side : 3 part with the guide pin and upper

side : 3 part with the pin hole).
Finally, assemble the uppermost ring unit

(consisting of under side : 3 part seal ring
with the pin hole and upper side : 3 part
scraper ring with th eguide pin).
11. Use the stuffing box half on the worktable

to adjust the height of all the assembled
ring units on the piston rod until the ring
units are opposite the corresponding
grooves in the stuffing box housing.
Subsequently, push the stuffing box half
into contact with the piston rod, round the
ring units.
4X-10285
Overhaul
12. Check the ring clearance again. 12.
Then place the other half of the stuffing box

housing on the worktable, pushing it into
place round the rings. D-3
Mount and tighten up the fitted bolts to the
torque specified on the Data Sheet.
Mount the O-ring in the stuffing box groove.
13. Mount eye bolts and wire ropes, and lift the
stuffing box a little.
GN902-2.3 203 12 L0a

Remove the worktable and lower the stuff-
ing box until it rests against the distance
pieces on the piston rod foot.
Remove wire ropes and screws. GN902-2.3 203 13 L0a 13.
4X-10285
Mounting
Mounting
902-2.4
1. 1. After overhauling, assemble the stuffing

box halves on top of the four screws.
Mount the two long screws from the

worktable in the stuffing box.
Turn down the short screws so that the

stuffing box lands on the flange.
2. Turn the piston upwards until the stuffing

box is in place in the cylinder frame.
Note!
Make sure that the two guide pins in the

MB902-2.4 207 01 L0a
flange enter the guide holes in the bottom

of the cylinder frame.
3. Mount two screws in the flange through the

holes in the worktable.
2.
GN902-2.4 203 02 L0a
3.
GN902-2.4 203 03 L0c
4X-10285
Mounting
4. Remove the long screws from the stuffing 4.

box and mount them in the worktable.
Remove the worktable from the piston rod.
5. Mount and tighten all the inner and outer

screws for the stuffing box. See Data.
6. Remove the protecting cover from the

piston rod/crosshead.
Smear the piston rod with molybdenum

disulphide.
GN902-2.4 203 04 L0c

Then turn the crankshaft a couple of
revolutions.
Start up the engine and keep it running for

approx. fifteen minutes at a number of 5.
revolutions corresponding to very slow or
idle speed.
Then stop the engine and inspect the piston

rod and stuffing box.
GN902-2.4 203 05 L0b
D-4 D-5
6.
GN902-2.2 203 01 L0a
4X-10285
S60MC-C Piston and Piston Rod Panel Plate 90251-0246M
C 4X-10285
Plate 90251-0246M Piston and Piston Rod Panel S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
014 Panel for tools *) (P902)
040 Lifting tool for piston rod 02A14
051 Lifting and tilting screw 03A15
075 Template for piston top 02A71
087 Distance piece fro stuffing box 02B55
099 Cover *) (02B68)
109 Hook for mounting of spring 02B58
110 Pressure tester 02A79
122 Work table 02B57
134 Piston ring expander 02A63
158 Guide screw for piston crown 02A47
183 Pulling tool 02B47
*) Optional extras
C 4X-10285
S60MC-C Piston and Rod - Tools Plate 90261-0101M
C 4X-10285
Plate 90261-0101M Piston and Rod - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
019 Guide ring for piston 02A53
020 Lifting tool for piston 02A11
044 Tilting tool for piston *) (02A13)
056 Support for piston 02A55
081 Support for tilting tool *) (02A16)
M1 Support for tilting tool *) (02A16)
M2 Dismantling screw 02A47
*) Optional extras
C 4X-10285
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C Cylinder Liner 103-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0026
103-1 Cylinder Liner
X Stopped engine Risk of falling
X Block the starting mechanism Do not enter area when over head
X Shut off fuel oil
X Shut off lubricating oil
Data
D-1 Cylinder diameter, new 600 mm
D-2 Cylinder liner, complete 3350 kg
D-3 Cooling jacket 286 kg
D-5 Cylinder cover stud 58 kg
D-6 Piston cleaning ring

diameter, new 598.6 mm
D-7 Piston cleaning ring

thickness, new 46.2 mm
The cylinder liner should be renewed if wear

exceeds 0.4-0.8 % of the cylinder diameter.
When the cylinder liner is replaced, the new piston

cleaning ring should be used at the same time.
When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet D10301 Edition 0026Ma Page 1 (2)
4X-09541
103-1 Cylinder Liner S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet D10301 Edition 0026Ma
4X-09541
S60MC-C Cylinder Liner 903-1.1
Checking
Cylinder Liner
S60MC-C
0221
Checking
903-1.1
1. Dismount the cylinder cover. 2.

Discard the mild steel ring between the cyl-
inder liner and the cylinder cover. D-1
cylinder liner and clean it. Especially the in-
clined grooves on the inside must be
cleaned carefully.
If the piston cleaning ring looks normaly, it
way be remounted. However, if it is dam-
aged or gets abnormal wear contact MIT-
SUI ENGINEERING & SHIPBUILDING
CO., LTD. for advise.
Dismount the piston.
GN903-1.1 203 02 L0c

Clean the cylinder liner and scavenge air
ports.
2. Position the cylinder liner measuring rod to
the cylinder liner.
Measure the cylinder liner according to the
points indicated on the measuring rod. 3.
See Data.
3. Take measurements in the FORE-and-AFT
GN903-1.1 203 03 L0a
and athwartship directions.

4. Check and assess the condition of the cyl-
inder liner according to the description
given in Vol. 1, Chapter 707.
Carefully scratch over any scores or marks
on the cylinder liner running surface, by 4.
means of a rough grindstone held in the
hand.
Using a grinding machine, remove the wear
ridges at the top and bottom of the cylinder
liner (where the piston rings reverse direc-
tion ), so that a smooth transition is formed.
Check the lubricating points of the cylinder
by manually pumping cylinder oil to each
EN903-1.1 205 04 L0b
individual lubricating point.

Clean any blocked lubricating duct.
Mount the piston and cylinder cover.
See Procedure 901-1.4. and 902-1.4.
Note!
Crosshead L
In cases where shims have been mount- Shim
ed between the piston rod and the cross- L=30 mm + T mm
head, the length of the measuring rod
must be adjusted in accordance with the T mm
thickness of the shims.
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90301 Edition 0221Ma Page 1 (11)
4X-09541
903-1.1 Cylinder Liner S60MC-C
Checking
5. 5. Compare the measured diameter of cylin-

der liner at the position No.5 marked “PC”
on the measuring tool with that of the new
cylinder liner to calculate the wear amount,
see Data.
If the wear of cylinder liner at “PC” in diam-

D-6 eter is below 0.7 mm then re-use the over-
hauled piston cleaning ring.
If the wear of cylinder liner at “PC“ in diam-

eter is below 0.7 mm or over, and below 1.4
mm then install the oversized piston clean-
ing ring by 0.7 mm diameter. (to be ordered
as a spare parts.)
311206MA05
If the wear of cylinder liner at “PC“ in diam-

eter is below 1.4 mm or over, then install
the oversized piston cleaning ring by 1.4
mm in diameter. (to be ordered as a spare
parts.)
Measure the inside diameter A of the piston

cleaning ring in the Fore-and-Aft and
athwartship direction with an inside micro-
meter. Compare the measured dismeter A
with the original one, see Data(D-6), to cal-
culate the wear of piston cleaning ring in di-
ameter.
If the significant wear amount of piston

cleaning ring in diameter is measured, con-
tact MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIPBUILD-
ING CO., LTD. for further action.
Measure the thickness B of piston cleaning

ring at PORT side, FORE side, STAR-
BOARD side, and AFT side. Compare the
measured thickness B with the original one,
see Data(D-7), to calculate the wear of pis-
ton cleaning ring in radius.
If the significant deviation of wear in radius

is measured, contact with engine builder for
further action.
Further more, in case of the metallic con-

tact between piston crown top land and pis-
ton cleaning ring, check the wear of piston
skirt.
Page 2 (11) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90301 Edition 0221Ma
4X-09541
Dismantling
Dismantling
903-1.2
1. Dismount the cylinder cover. 1.

Discard the seal ring from the top of the

cylinder liner.

cylinder liner.
Turn the piston down far enough to make it

possible to grind away the wear ridges at
the top of the liner with a hand-grinder.
EN903-1.2 205 01 L0b

Dismount the piston.

Mount the two lifting screws in the cylinder

liner. 2.
Caution!
Tighten firmly the lifting tools against the

contact surface of the cylinder liner,
(Tightening torgue: approx. 200 Nm)
Other wise the lifting tools might be dam-
aged.
2. Disconnect - at the exhaust side of the

cylinder - the oil pipes leading from the
HN903-1.2 221 02 L0a
cylinder lubricator to the non-return valves.

Disconnect the pipes from the distributor
block.
4X-09541
Dismantling
3. 3. Remove the screws of the cooling water

inlet pipe.
4. Attach the crane to the lifting crossbar.
Hook the chains from the lifting crossbar on

to the lifting screws and lift the cylinder liner
with the cooling jacket out of the cylinder
frame.
Note!
HN903-1.2 206 03 L0a
Low lifting height in the engine room may

require the removal of one or more
cylinder cover studs before dismantling
the cylinder liner.
4.
Land the cylinder liner vertically on, for
instance, a couple of planks.
Clean the cylinder frame internally, taking

special care with the contact surfaces for
the cylinder liner at the top of the cylinder
frame.
Discard the O-rings on the cooling water

pipes.
Clean the pipes carefully.

EN903-1.2 205 04 L0b
4X-09541
Dismantling
5. The lifting screws are also used for 5.

transporting the cylinder liner.
Note!
The cylinder liner is not in balance, even

with the cooling jacket mounted.
To keep the liner in a horizontal position

during transportation, use e.g. a wire
rope connected from the scavenge ports
to the traverse as shown on the sketch.
D-2
EN903-1.2 205 05 L0c
4X-09541
Overhaul
Overhaul
903-1.3
1. 1. Unscrew the nuts on the non-return valves

and remove the valves.
Clean and inspect the non-return valves.
Disassemble the distributor block.
2. Attach two tackles to the crossbar, as

shown.
Mount two lifting eye bolts in the cooling

jacket.
HN903-1.3 221 01 L0a
Hook the tackles on to the lifting eye bolts

on the cooling jacket and haul tight.
Remove the two lifting screws from the

cylinder liner.
2.
Remove the four clamps which fix the
cooling jacket to the cylinder liner.
3. Lift the cooling jacket away by means of the

tackles, and land it on the wooden planks.
EN903-1.3 205 01 L0b
3.
D-3
EN903-1.3 205 02 L0b
4X-09541
Overhaul
4. Check and assess the condition of the 4.

cylinder liner according to the description
given in Vol. 1, Chapter 707.
Carefully scratch over any scores or marks

on the cylinder liner running surface, by
means of a rough grindstone held in the
hand.
Check in the top of the liner for a wear ridge

(where the piston rings reverse direction). If
there is any sign of a wear ridge, it is
necessary to create a groove by grinding.
See step 5. The groove serves to prevent
the build-up of a new wear ridge.
5. Place an old piston ring on the top of the

piston and turn to a position that enables
the grinding disc to rest on the old piston
ring while removing the wear ridge. Use a
grinding disc with a round edge.
HN903-1.3 221 04 L0a
Check the distance H before grinding to

ascertain that the wear ridge was caused
by the top ring at TDC.
The maximum depths of the groove is

calculated as S max. = D x 0.0045. 5.
Note!
It is of utmost importance that the groove

is made with a regular rounding as
shown in the sketch.
HN903-1.3 221 05 L0a
4X-09541
Overhaul
6. 6. Using a grinding machine or a rough

grindstone held in the hand, remove the
wear ridge at the bottom of the cylinder
liner (where the piston rings reverse
direction), so that a smooth transition is
formed.
Clean the cylinder liner and the cooling

jacket both internally and externally. Pay
special attention to the O-ring grooves and
lubricating ducts.
Replace the two uppermost O-rings on the

GN903-1.3 203 04 L0b
cylinder liner.
4X-09541
Overhaul
7. Lower the cooling jacket on to the cylinder 7.

liner.
Note!
Make sure that the scratch marks in the

camshaft side of the cylinder liner and
cooling jacket coincide. D-3
8. Mount the four clamps in the groove of the
liner, and tighten the screws.
EN903-1.3 205 05 L0b

Remove the tackles from the lifting
crossbar and the cooling jacket lifting eye
bolts.
9. Mount the non-return valves for cylinder 8.

lubrication. Tighten the nuts and connect
the lubricating oil pipes.
Clean the distributor block and assemble

the block.
EN903-1.3 205 06 L0b
9.
HN903-1.3 221 01 L0a
4X-09541
Mounting
Mounting
903-1.4
1. 1. Loosen the water connections on the

cooling jacket.
Mount the two lifting screws in the cylinder

liner.
Caution!
Tighten firmly the lifting tools against the

contact surface of the cylinder liner,
(Tightening torgue: approx. 200 Nm)
D-2 Other wise the lifting tools might be dam-
aged.
Hook the chains from the lifting crossbar on

to the lifting screws, and lift the jacket/liner
assembly.
Mount the lowermost O-ring and apply a

little lubricating oil on the ring.
EN903-1.4 205 01 L0b
2. Check that the joint surfaces on the cylinder

frame and cylinder liner are completely
clean.
Coat the joint surfaces with permatex or a

2. similar liquid seal compound.
Mount the cylinder liner in the cylinder

frame. Replace the O-rings on the water
connections and mount the water
connections on the cooling jacket.
If one or more cylinder cover studs have

been removed during the dismantling of the
cylinder liner, remount the studs using the
stud setter.
EN903-1.4 205 02 L0b
4X-09541
Mounting
3. Fit a new gasket between the cooling water 3.

inlet pipe and the cooling jacket. Mount and
tighten the screws.
4. Mount the non-return valves for cylinder

lubrication in the bores of the liner.
Screw the pipes from the lubricator on to

the non-return valves, but do not tighten.
Vent the cylinder lubricating system by

manually pumping each individual pipe
through until oil, without air bubbles, comes
HN903-1.2 206 03 L0a

out from the union pipe/non-return valve.
When this is in order, tighten the pipes

firmly on the non-return valves and again
pump manually until it is certain that each
individual lubricating point functions 4.
correctly.
5. Lubricate the upper part inside of the

cylinder liner with cylinder lubricating oil
and mount the piston.
6. Mount the seal ring and the cylinder cover.

EN903-1.4 205 04 L0b
Note!
Make sure to mount the piston cleaning

ring correctly, so that the scratching
marks are aligned.
6.
Tighten the upper water connections on the
cooling jacket as soon as the cylinder cover
is correctly positioned.
Make sure to mount the piston dean ring

with marking “TOP CAMESIDE” correctly.
Check if there is no contact between piston
dean ring and piston crown by turning gear
both clock and counterclockwise around
TDC.
HN901-1.4 206 01
4X-09541
S60MC-C Cylinder Lubricators (Alpha Lubricator) 103-2
Data

Special Data
S60MC-C
0005
103-2 Cylinder Lubricators (Alpha Lubricator)
X Stopped engine
Shut off cooling water
Shut off fuel oil
Shut off lubrication oil
Data
Alpha Lubricator:
See Vol. 4 448 “Lubricator”
When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet D10302 Edition 0005Ma Page 1 (2)
4X-09541
103-2 Cylinder Lubricators (Alpha Lubricator) S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet D10302 Edition 0005Ma
4X-09541
S60MC-C Cylinder Liner - Tools Plate 90361-0067M
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure P90361 Edition 0067M Page 1 (4)
C 4X-09541
Plate 90361-0067M Cylinder Liner - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
M1 Standard gauge for cylinder bore 03A71
M2 Measuring rod for cylinder liner 03A73
M3 Lifting crossbar for cylinder liner 03A12
M4 Cover for cylinder bore 03A52
Page 2 (4) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure P90361 Edition 0067M
C 4X-09541
S60MC-C Cylinder Liner - Extra Tools Plate 90362-0003M
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure P90362 Edition 0003M Page 3 (4)
C 4X-09541
Plate 90362-0003M Cylinder Liner - Extra Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
018 Wear ride milling machine *) (03A26)
*) Optional extra
Page 4 (4) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure P90362 Edition 0003M
C 4X-09541
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C Crosshead Bearing 104-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0023
104-1 Crosshead Bearing
Slippy surfaced and risk of falling
X Engage turning gear (while at work in crankcase)
X Shut off cooling water Risk of severe personall injury

(while engine being turned)
X Shut off fuel oil
2 x 2400 kg, 2 x 600 kg
Lock turbocharger rotors 40-280 Nm, 100-750 Nm
Data
Ref. Description Value Unit 2 x M12, 2 x M20
2 x M24, 2 x M30
D-1 Top clearance in crosshead bearing
See Vol.1 “Operation & Data”.
1 x 1.5 m, 4 x 3 m
D-2 Oil wedge length, L = 15 mm
D-3 Dismantling
2 x 1000 kg
- hydraulic pressure 150-165 MPa
(1500-1650 bar) 2 x 2000 kg
Tightening
- hydraulic pressure 150 MPa
(1500 bar)
D-4 Crosshead bearing cap,

complete 313 kg
D-5 Crosshead + piston compl. 3400 kg
D-6 Bearing shell, lower 40 kg
D-7 Crosshead, complete 1892 kg
D-8 Piston rod

- tightening torque or 590 Nm
- tightening angle 60 °
D-9 Bearing shell, upper 25 kg
When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet D10401 Edition 0023Md Page 1 (2)
4X-05482
104-1 Crosshead Bearing S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet D10401 Edition 0023Md
4X-05482
S60MC-C Crosshead Bearing 904-1.1
Checking
Crosshead Bearing
S60MC-C
0222
Checking
904-1.1
2.
The top clearance between the journal and a
new bearing shell is the result of a summation
of the production tolerances of the bearing
components.
For the top clearance of a specific bearing, see

the measurement in the Adjustment Sheet in
Vol. 1, “Operation & Data”.
1. Open the crankcase door at the relevant

cylinder.
2. Turn the crankthrow concerned to 90° be-
GN904-1.1 203 02
fore BDC on the exhaust side.
3. Measure the clearance in the crosshead

bearing by inserting a feeler gauge be-
tween the bearing cap and the crosshead
journal, exactly next to the landing surface 3.
for the piston rod foot. See Data. 4.
4. The difference between the actual clear-

ance measurement and the measurement
recorded in the Adjustment Sheet (or the
clearance noted for a new bearing installed
later) must not exceed 0.1 mm. If so, the
crosshead bearing must be disassembled
for inspection. See Procedure 904-1.2.
D-1
5. The wear limit for a crosshead bearing shell
is confined to a 50% reduction of the oil
wedge length (L). See Data.
HN904-1.1 222 03
6. For further external inspection of the cross-

head bearing, see Chapter 708, ‘Bearings’
in the instruction book, Vol. 1, “Operation &
Data”. 5.
GN904-1.1 203 05 L0c
D-2
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90401 Edition 0222M Page 1 (10)
C 4X-05482
904-1.2 Crosshead Bearing S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
904-1.2
1. This procedure applies to the following two

dismantling situations:
• with piston mounted
• with piston removed
With piston mounted:
1. Turn the crankshaft down far enough to

give access to the screws on the piston rod.
2. Mount two chains in the inner screw holes

GN904-1.1 203 02
in the top of the crankcase, in the athwarth-

ship direction, for suspending the piston
rod.
3. Loosen and remove the locking wire from

2. the screws on the piston rod foot. Remove
the screws.
HN904-1.2 222 02
3.
HN904-1.2 222 03
Page 2 (10) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90401 Edition 0222M
MITSUI EINGINEERING & SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD.
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
4. Mount a lifting eye bolt on each side of the 4.

piston rod.
5. Turn the crosshead to TDC.
Hook the chains to the lifting eye bolts in

the piston rod.
Turn the crosshead downward, and the pis-

ton rod will then remain suspended from
the two chains.
With piston removed:
HN904-1.2 222 04
6. Turn to BDC.
7. Place the spacer rings around the nuts and

screw the hydraulic jacks on to the studs.
5.
Loosen the crosshead bearing cap nuts.
For operation of the hydraulic jacks, see
Procedure 913.
Remove the hydraulic jacks and the spacer

rings, and unscrew the nuts.
HN904-1.2 222 05
7.
D-3
HN904-5.2 217 01
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
8. 8. Mount the lifting attachments on the head

of the connecting rod.
9. Suspend two tackles from the lifting brack-

ets, in the athwarthship direction.
10. Mount two eye bolts in the top of the cross-

head bearing cap.
Hook the tackles on to the eye bolts, and

remove the cap bearing from the engine.
Check the upper part of the journal.
HN904-1.2 222 08 L0a
9.
HN904-1.2 222 09 L0a
10.
D-4
HN904-1.2 222 10 L0b
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
11. Place the bearing cap on one side on a 11.

couple of wooden planks. D-9
Check the bearing shell, see Procedure
904-1.1.
12. Fasten tackles to the fixed lifting brackets

on the frame box wall.
GN904-1.2 203 11 L0b

13. Turn the crosshead upwards until the piston
rod lands on the crosshead. Ensure that the
guide ring in the crosshead fits correctly in
the centre hole of the piston rod.
Do not remove the chains or lifting eye 12.

bolts.
GN904-1.2 203 12 L0a
13.
GN904-1.2 203 13
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
14. 14. Turn to TDC and attach the tackle hooks to

the lifting attachments. Haul the tackles
tight.
15. Mount the four supports for guide shoes on

the crosshead guides.
Carefully turn the crank down towards the

exhaust side, until the guide shoes rest on
the supports.
Adjust the support brackets to the guide

shoes so that the weight of the crosshead
GN904-1.2 203 14
is evenly distributed on the four supports.
Haul the tackles tight.
16. Turn the crankthrow carefully towards BDC

15. while ‘following’ with the tackles, thus con-
tinuously supporting the connecting rod.
17. With the crosshead resting on the supports,

check the lower part of the crosshead jour-
nal and the lower bearing shell.
Regarding checking of journal and bearing

shells, see Vol. 1, “Operation & Data”,
Chapter 708, “Bearings”.
HN904-1.2 222 15 L0a
16.
17. D-5
HN904-1.2 222 16 L0a
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
18. In cases where it is necessary to remove 18.

the lower bearing shell, tilt the connecting
rod towards the door in the camshaft side,
using the tackles.
D-6
Dismount the locking screws, and turn the
bearing shell so far up that an eye bolt can
be mounted.
Lift the bearing shell out of the engine.
GN904-1.2 203 18 L0a
C 4X-05482
Mounting
Mounting
904-1.4
1. With piston mounted/

With piston removed:
D-6
1. Mount and secure the bearing shell in the
bearing housing.
The excess height X is to ensure the cor-

rect tightening-down of the bearing shell
and must not be eliminated.
2. Raise the connecting rod to an upright po-

sition.
GN904-1.4 203 01 L0b
Turn to TDC while ‘following’ with the tack-

les, for assembling the crosshead and the
connecting rod.
Take care that the guide shoes do not dam-

2. age the bearing shell.
D-7 3. Remove the supports from the crosshead

guides.
Remove the tackles from the crosshead.
Turn the crank throw to BDC.
If the piston is mounted, slowly turn down

until it is fully suspended from the chains.
HN904-1.4 222 02 L0a
3.
HN904-1.4 222 03 L0a
C 4X-05482
Mounting
4.
4. Lift the bearing cap into the engine. Lower D-4
the bearing cap onto the crosshead and
remove the tackles. Remove the lifting
attachments from the connecting rod.
Note!
Take care that the bearing studs do not

damage the crosshead.
5. Tighten all four crosshead bearing cap nuts
HN904-1.4 222 04 L0b

simultaneously. See Data.
For operation of hydraulic jacks, see Sec-
tion 913.
6. Mount the piston.

See Procedure 902-1.4. 5.
With piston mounted:
7. Turn the crosshead upwards until the piston

rod lands on the crosshead. Ensure that the
guide ring in the crosshead fits correctly in
the centre hole of the piston rod.
D-3
HN904-5.2 217 01
7.
GN904-1.4 203 07
C 4X-05482
Mounting
8. 8. Unhook the chains from the lifting eye bolts

in the piston rod. Remove the chains and
eye bolts from the top of the crankcase,
from the piston rod and from the crosshead
bearing cap.
9. Turn down to BDC, tighten the screws in

the piston rod, and lock with locking wire.
See Data.

GN904-1.2 203 19
the wire is tightened if a screw works loose.

9.
HN904-1.4 222 09
C 4X-05482
S60MC-C Crosshead 104-2
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0024
104-2 Crosshead
X Shut off cooling water Risk of severe personall injury

X Shut off fuel oil 40-280 Nm

1 x 1.5 m
Lock turbocharger rotors 4x3m
Data 4 x M20
4 x M30
D-1 Dismantling
(1500-1650 bar)
Tightening
(1500 bar)
D-2 Crosshead bearing cap 263 kg

2 x 2000 kg
D-3 Crosshead complete 1892 kg
D-4 Connecting rod 1851 kg
D-5 Guide shoe 314 kg
D-6 Cooling oil outlet pipe 32 kg
D-7 Outlet pipe

D-8 Guide plate

D-9 Nuts on guide strips

D-8 Piston rod

When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet D10402 Edition 0024Mb Page 1 (2)
4X-05482
104-2 Crosshead S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet D10402 Edition 0024Mb
4X-05482
S60MC-C Crosshead 904-2.2
Dismantling
Crosshead
S60MC-C
0223
Dismantling
904-2.2
2.
1. Dismount the piston.
2. Dismount the main bearing lubricating oil

pipes.
3. Dismount the cooling oil outlet pipe from

the guide shoe and the drain oil slotted
pipe.
Loosen and remove the screws which se-

cure the telescopic pipe to the guide shoe.
GN904-2.2 203 02
In order to reach the screw in the corner be-
hind the telescopic pipe, use the offset tool
along with a socket wrench.
4. Mount the retaining tool for the telescopic

pipe on the stuffing box housing for the tel- 3.
escopic pipe.
Turn the crosshead to TDC.
Suspend the telescopic pipe by means of

the tool.
Turn the crosshead to gain access to the

nuts on the crosshead bearing studs.
Mount two eye bolts in the top of the

crankcase in the FORE-and-AFT direction.
GN904-2.2 204 03
Mount the spacer rings and the hydraulic

jacks for loosening the nuts on the cross-
head bearing studs.
For operation of the hydraulic tools, see 4.

Section 913.
Loosen the nuts, remove the hydraulic D-6

jacks and unscrew the nuts. D-1
HN904-2.2 223 04
C 4X-05482
904-2.2 Crosshead S60MC-C
Dismantling
5. 5. Mount eye bolts in the crosshead bearing

D-2 cap and hook the tackles on to the lifting
brackets in the top of the crankcase.
Dismount the bearing cap and lift it out of

the engine.
6. Mount the special lifting tool on the cross-

head.
Mount the lifting attachments for fixing the

connecting rod, on the head of the connect-
ing rod.
HN904-2.2 223 05 L0a
Fasten tackles to the lifting brackets on the

frame box wall and attach the tackle hooks
to the lifting attachments. Haul the tackles
tight.
6.
Attach the flat-plaited wire strap to the en-
gine room crane.
D-3 Hook the engine room crane on to the lifting

tool on the crosshead, and lift the cross-
head.
7. Using the tackles, tilt the connecting rod to-

wards the exhaust side, while turning the
crankthrow towards the camshaft side.
Transfer the tackles from one lifting attach-

ment to another as necessary.
HN904-2.2 223 06
When the crankthrow is 90° after BDC, stop

turning.
7. By alternate use of the tackles, tilt the con-

necting rod until it rests against a couple of
D-4 wooden planks in the bottom of the bed-
plate.
HN904-2.2 223 07
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
8. Lower the crosshead to a position just 8.

above the main bearing caps.
Remove the guide strips and both guide

plates from the guide shoes.
Mount a lifting eye bolt in one of the guide

shoes, and hook on a tackle.
Squeeze in a plank between the guide

shoes.
9. Suspend two tackles from the eye bolts in
HN904-2.2 223 08
the top of the crankcase in the FORE-and-
AFT direction.
Mount an eye bolt in the top of each guide

shoe.
9.
Mount the guide shoe extractor tool on the D-5
guide shoe.
Hook the tackles on to the eye bolts in the

guide shoes, haul tight and, at the same
time, using the guide shoe extractor tool,
pull the crosshead towards the extractor
tool until it is free of the opposite guide
shoe.
Follow the movement of the crosshead with

the engine room crane.
HN904-2.2 223 09
Lift up the free guide shoe.
10. Using the guide shoe extractor tool, push

the crosshead away from the remaining
guide shoe, until the crosshead is free of 10.
the guide shoe.

Dismount the guide shoe extractor tool.
Lift up the guide shoe.

HN904-2.2 223 10
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
11. 11. Turn the crosshead 90°.
12. Mount the wire guide tool in the framebox

door opening.
By means of wire rope and tackles, remove

the crosshead from the engine.
Protect the crosshead, for instance with

thick or corrugated paper, and land it
outside the engine.
If necessary, remove the guide shoes from

HN904-2.2 223 11
the engine.
12.
HN904-2.2 223 12
C 4X-05482
Mounting
Mounting
904-2.4
1. Attach the flat-plaited wire strap to the 1.

engine room crane. D-5 D-3
Lift the crosshead into the engine, using
wire rope, tackles, and the engine room
crane.
2. Turn the crosshead 90°.
3. Lower one guide shoe and mount the guide

shoe extractor tool.
Use the guide shoe extractor tool to pull the
HN904-2.2 223 11
crosshead so far through the guide shoe
that the other guide shoe can be lowered.

3.
4. Lower the other guide shoe.
Use the guide shoe extractor tool to push

the crosshead towards the second guide
shoe.

HN904-2.4 223 03
4.
HN904-2.4 223 04
C 4X-05482
Mounting
5. 5. Mount the guide plates on the side of the

D-8 D-9 guide shoes.
Tighten the screws. See Data.
Using the engine room crane, lift the cross-

head to a working position and mount the
guide strips on the side of the guide shoes.
6. Using the tackles, lift the connecting rod to

a vertical position while turning the crank-
HN904-2.4 223 05
throw to BDC.
7. When the connecting rod is in a vertical po-

sition, lower the crosshead and land it on
the connecting rod.
6.
Remove the lifting attachments from the
connecting rod head.
D-4 Remove the lifting tool from the crosshead.

HN904-2.4 223 06
7.
HN904-2.2 223 06
C 4X-05482
Mounting
8. Lift the crosshead bearing cap into the en- 8.

gine.
D-2
9. Mount the spacer rings and the hydraulic
jacks for tightening the nuts on the cross-
head bearing studs.

Procedure 913.
Mount the drain oil slotted pipe and the

cooling oil outlet pipe on the guide shoe.
HN904-2.2 223 05 L0a

Turn the crankshaft to TDC.
Land the telescopic pipe on the guide shoe.
10. For tightening the bolt in the corner behind

the telescopic pipe, use the offset tool 9.
along with the torque wrench.
D-1 D-10
11. Mount the lubricating oil pipes on the main
bearing caps. D-7
12. Mount the piston.
HN904-2.2 223 04
10.
D-1
GN904-2.2 204 03
C 4X-05482
S60MC-C Reciprocating Parts 104-3
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0022
104-3 Reciprocating Parts
X Stopped engine Slippy surfaced and risk of falling

(while at work in crankcase)
Risk of severe personal injury
X Shut off starting air supply (while engine being turned)
X Shut off fuel oil
Data
Acceptance criteria with

piston in centre
(F-A direction)
Meas. Value
points
PF+PA Nmax 0.60 mm

Omax 1.10 mm
E+G Nmax 0.55 mm

H+F Nmin 0.20 mm
Omax 0.85 mm
J+C, Nmax 0.90 mm

K+C, Nmin 0.50 mm
L+D, Omax 1.10 mm
M+D
ZF/ZA Omax
5.00 mm
N: New and cold engine
with staybolts tightened
(less than 100 running
hours).
O: Engine in service.
When referring to this page, please quote Data D10403 Edition 0022M Page 1 (2)
C 4X-05482
104-3 Reciprocating Parts S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data D10403 Edition 0022M
C 4X-05482
S60MC-C Reciprocating Parts 904-3.1
Checking
Reciprocating Parts
S60MC-C
0212
Checking
904-3.1
1.
In order to achieve uniform measuring condi-
tions on board, the ship’s trim must be as close
as possible to 0°.
1. Mount a transparent plastic tube along the

length of the bedplate.
Bend each end approx. 250 mm up along
GN904-3.1 203 01
the framebox side. See T
Fill the tube with water (possibly coloured)

until the water level is approx. 100 mm from
the end of the tube.
2.
Trim the ship until the difference between
the water level S fore and aft is less than
1.5 mm per 1000 mm.
Measurements are to be taken with a ruler.
2. Turn the crankshaft in ASTERN direction to

45° after BDC (the guide shoe must rest
against the crosshead guide).
Check the centering of the piston in the cyl-

inder liner by measuring the clearance (by
applying a long feeler gauge from the scav-
enge air space) between the piston skirt
and the cylinder liner in the FORE-and-AFT
HN904-3.1 212 02
positions (PF-PA).
Make sure that the piston is clear of the

cylinder liner in the FORE-and-AFT direc-
tion.
3.
3. Turn in astern direction until the bottom of
the guide shoe is 50 mm in the vertical di-
rection above the top of the cut out in the
web plate.
HN904-3.1 212 03
MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIPBUILDING
C 4X-05482
904-3.1 Reciprocating Parts S60MC-C
Checking
4. 4. Measure the clearance between the crank-

throw and the connecting rod.
5. Measure the clearance between the stop

plate and the crosshead (C and D).
Measure the clearance between the cross-

head guides and the guide shoes (E, F, G
and H).
Measure the clearance between the guide

strips and crosshead guides (J, K, L and
M).
The clearance, calculated as J+C, K+C,

L+D and M+D, is adjusted by the insertion
of shims so that it is symmetrical in relation
to the clearance between the piston skirt
and the cylinder liner.
Parallelism between the guide strip and

guide is to be kept within a tolerance of 0.2
mm per 1000 mm.
HN904-3.1 212 04
5.
HN904-3.1 212 05
C 4X-05482
S60MC-C Reciprocating Parts 904-3.1
Checking
6. It is recommended that the measured re- 6.

sults are noted down so that possible later
changes can be ascertained.
HN904-3.1 207 05
C 4X-05482
S60MC-C Crankpin Bearing 104-4
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0021
104-4 Crankpin Bearing
Shut off cooling water Risk of severe personall injury

Shut off fuel oil
2 x 1 m-500 kg

2 x 1.5 m, 1 x 3 m
Data
4 x 1000 kg, 2 x 2500 kg
D-1 Clearances in crankpin bearing: 2 x M16

See Vol. 1 “Operation & Data”. 2 x M30
D-2 Dismantling
(1500-1650 bar)
D-3 Tightening
(1500 bar) 2 x 3000 kg
D-4 Crankpin bearing

- upper shell 34 kg
D-5 Crankpin bearing

- lower shell 29 kg
D-6 Crankpin bearing cap +

shell + bearing studs 254 kg
4X-05482
104-4 Crankpin Bearing S60MC-C
Data
4X-05482
S60MC-C Crankpin Bearing 904-4.1
Checking
Crankpin Bearing
S60MC-C
0217
Checking
904-4.1
2.
The bottom clearance between the journal and
a new bearing shell is the result of a summation
of the production tolerances of the bearing
assembly components.
For the bottom clearance of a specific bearing,

see the measurement in the Adjustment Sheet
in Vol. 1, “Operation & Data”.
1. Open the crankcase door at the relevant

cylinder.
2. Turn the crank concerned to BDC.
GN902-1.2 204 01
3. Measure the clearance in the crankpin
bearing by inserting a feeler gauge at the
bottom of the bearing shell in both sides.
See Data for bottom clearance.
3.
4. The difference between the actual clear-
ance measurement and the measurement
recorded in the Adjustment Sheet (or the
clearance noted for a new bearing installed
later) must not exceed 0.1 mm. If so, the
crankpin bearing must be disassembled for
inspection.
5. The wear limit for the crankpin bearing

shells is based on an evaluation of the
bearing condition at the time of inspection.
GN904-4.1 203 03
An average wear rate of 0.01 mm per D-1

10,000 hours is regarded as normal.
6. For further external inspection of the crank-

pin bearing, see Chapter 708 ‘Bearings' in 5.
the instruction book, Vol. 1, “Operation &
Data”.
HN904-4.1 217 05
C 4X-05482
904-4.2 Crankpin Bearing S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
904-4.2
2. 1. Turn the crank to BDC.
2. Suspend two tackles from the lifting brack-

ets, in the athwartship direction.
3. Turn the crank to TDC.
Mount eye bolts in each side of the crank-

pin bearing cap and, using shackles and
wire ropes, hook on the tackles and haul
tight.
Loosen the crankpin bearing stud nuts,

HN904-4.2 217 02
using the hydraulic jacks.

Procedure 913-1.
3. Remove the hydraulic jacks and the nuts.
4. Lower the bearing cap while seeing care-

fully that the studs do not damage the
crankpin journal.
Land the bearing cap on a couple of planks

placed in the oil pan.
D-2 Inspect the bearing shell.
For evaluation of bearings, see Vol. 1,

Chapter 708.
GN904-4.2 203 03
4.
D-6
HN904-4.2 217 04
MITSUI ENGINEERING & SIHPBUILDING CO., LTD.
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
5. If the bearing shell needs to be replaced, 5.

remove the whole bearing cap from the
crankcase.
Hook the tackle on to an eye bolt on one

side of the bearing cap.
Mount the wire guide in the top of the

crankcase door opening.
Using the tackle from the frame box inside D-6

wall, together with a tackle suspended from
the platform bracket, lift the bearing cap out
of the crankcase.
6. Place the bearing cap on one side on a

couple of planks.
Dismount the bearing shell lock screws and HN904-4.2 217 05
replace the bearing shell by a new one.
6.
Note! D-5
Normally bearing shells are replaced in
pairs.
If only one of the shells needs replace-

GN904-4.2 203 06
ment, MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIP-

BUILDING CO., LTD. should be con-
tacted for advice beforehand.
7. Turn to TDC. 7.
Mount the four supports for guide shoes on

Carefully turn the crank down until the

guide shoes rest on the supports.

HN904-4.2 217 07
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
8. 8. Mount a lifting attachment for securing the

connecting rod at the lower end, on one
side.
Hook on the tackle to a beam under the gal-

lery platform and haul tight.
9. Carefully turn the crankshaft downwards,

while ‘following’ with the tackle, making
sure that the upper part of the bearing
comes completely clear of the recess in the
crankshaft when the parts begin to ‘sepa-
rate’.
HN904-4.2 217 08
Continue turning the crankshaft until the

bearing surface can be freely inspected.
Inspect the bearing shell surface and the

9. crankpin journal.
10. If it is necessary to replace the bearing

shell, proceed as follows:
Turn the crankshaft to BDC.
Release the tackle so that the connecting

rod is hanging freely.
HN904-4.2 217 09
10.
HN904-4.2 217 10
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
11. Mount an eye bolt in the bottom of each 11.

guide shoe.
Suspend two tackles from the eye bolts.
12. Place the lifting tool for the crankpin upper

shell on the crank webs and hook the
tackles on to the lifting tool.
Mount the tool on the bearing shell in the

connecting rod, using the tackles, and haul
tight.
HN904-4.2 217 11
13. Dismount the bearing shell lock screws.
Lower the lifting tool with the bearing shell,

using the tackles.
HN904-4.2 217 12 12.
13.
D-4
HN904-4.2 217 13
C 4X-05482
Mounting
Mounting
904-4.4
1. 1. Bearing shells of three mm undersize are

available as spares in case of journal
rectification. Please contact MITSUI ENGI-
NEERING & SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD. for
advice.
Coat the bearing shell surfaces and the

GN904-4.4 203 01
journal with clean oil.
The excess height X is to ensure the cor-

rect tightening-down of the bearing shell,
and must not be eliminated.
2.
2. Lift the upper bearing shell for the crankpin
concerned into the crankcase.
Carefully lift the bearing shell into position

in the connecting rod, and mount the lock
screws.
3. Remove the lifting tool, the tackles and the

eye bolts from the guide shoes.
D-4
HN904-4.4 217 02
3.
HN904-4.4 217 03
C 4X-05482
Mounting
4. Hook the tackle on to a beam under the gal- 4.

lery platform and on to the lifting attach-
ment on the connecting rod, and haul tight.
Carefully turn the crankshaft upwards,

while following up with the tackle, making
sure that the upper part of t he bearing en-
ters the recess in the crankshaft when the
parts turn together.
Remove the tackle and the lifting attach-

ment from the connecting rod.
5. Turn the crosshead to TDC.
Remove the guide shoe support brackets

from the crosshead guides.
HN904-4.4 217 04
5.
HN904-4.4 217 05
C 4X-05482
Mounting
6. 6. Suspend the tackles from the lifting brack-

ets in the top of the frame box.
Lift the bearing cap assembly into the

crankcase and land it on a couple of planks
placed in the oil pan.
7. Hook the tackles on to the wire ropes and

lift the bearing cap into position against the
connecting rod.
D-6
Caution!
During mounting, take care that the studs

do not damage the crankpin journal, and
check that the guide pins mounted in the
bearing cap enter the holes in the con-
necting rod.
Mount the nuts and, by means of spacer

rings and hydraulic jacks, tighten the crank-
HN904-4.4 217 06
pin bearing cap. See Data.
For operation of hydraulic jacks, see Sec-

tion 913.
7.
Remove the tackles from the top of the
frame box.
Check the bearing clearance.

D-3
HN904-4.4 217 07
C 4X-05482
S60MC-C Connecting Rod 104-5
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0024
104-5 Connecting Rod
Shut off cooling water Risk of severe personall injury

Shut off fuel oil
2 x M16

4 x 1,5 m, 1 x 3 m
Data
D-1 Dismantling 3 x 3000 kg

(1500-1650 bar)
Tightening
(1500 bar)
D-2 Crankpin bearing cap 254 kg
D-3 Connecting rod 1851 kg
4X-05482
104-5 Connecting Rod S60MC-C
Data
4X-05482
S60MC-C Connecting Rod 904-5.2
Dismantling
Connecting Rod
S60MC-C
0217
Dismantling
904-5.2
1.
1. Turn the crank to BDC.
Dismount the crosshead bearing stud nuts.

2. Mount two shackles in the top of the crank-

case in the lifting brackets, in the athwart-
ship direction, and suspend two tackles.
3. Turn the crank to TDC.
Dismount the crankpin bearing cap, and re-

move the bearing cap from the engine.
HN904-5.2 217 01
HN904-5.2 217 02 2.
3.
D-1
D-2
GN904-5.2 203 03
C 4X-05482
904-5.2 Connecting Rod S60MC-C
Dismantling
4. 4. Mount the four supports for guide shoes on

Carefully turn the crank down towards the

camshaft side, until the guide shoes rest on
the supports.

5. Mount the lifting attachments for securing

the connecting rod on the head of the con-
HN904-5.2 217 04
necting rod.
Fasten tackles to lifting brackets A and B

on the frame box wall, and attach the tackle
hooks to the mentioned lifting attachments
5. on the connecting rod head.
D-3 Haul the tackles tight.

A B Also mount a lifting attachment on the lower
end of the connecting rod, on the exhaust
side.
6. Turn the crankthrow carefully towards BDC

C while ‘following’ with the tackles, thus con-
tinuously supporting the connecting rod.
The crosshead now rests on the four sup-

GN904-5.2 203 05 L0a
ports.
Turn the crankthrow to 90° before BDC.
6.
A B
C
GN904-5.2 203 06 L0a
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
7. Shift tackle B from the lifting attachment on 7.

one side of the connecting rod to the lifting
attachment on the other side.
A B
Dismount the lifting attachment on the cam-
shaft side of the connecting rod.
Attach a tackle to lifting bracket C on the C

frame box wall and connect the tackle hook
to the lifting attachment on the lower end of
the connecting rod.
Mount the wire guide on the door frame.
EN904-5.2 204 07 L0a

Turn the crankthrow towards TDC while
‘following’ with the tackles, thus continu-
ously supporting and guiding the connect-
ing rod towards the doorway.
8.
8. Attach a tackle to the gallery-mounted lift-
ing bracket E, and hook on to the lifting at-
tachment on the connecting rod. A B E
Shift tackle A from the lifting attachment on

the head of the connecting rod to the lifting
attachment at the bottom of the connecting
rod. C
Turn the crank carefully upwards while ‘fol-

lowing’ with tackles A, B, C and E, guiding
the head of the connecting rod out of the
EN904-5.2 204 08 L0a
doorway.
Shift the tackles from one lifting attachment

to the other as necessary.
9. Mount a strap around the connecting rod 9.

and suspend the connecting rod from the
engine room crane. Shift tackle B from the
lifting attachment on the head of the con- A B E
necting rod to the lifting attachment at the
bottom of the connecting rod.
Remove tackles A and E.

C
Continue turning upwards till about 30° af-
ter TDC while ‘following’ with the tackles
and the engine room crane.
EN904-5.2 204 09 L0a
C 4X-05482
Dismantling
10. 10. Shift the tackle from lifting bracket C to A.
Lift the connecting rod out of the engine,

A B E using the tackles and the engine room
crane.
Remove the tackles, and lift the connecting

rod away by means of the engine room
C crane.
EN904-5.2 204 10 L0a
C 4X-05482
Mounting
Mounting
904-5.4
1. Equip the connecting rod with the same 2.

lifting attachments as mentioned under
dismantling.
A B E
Turn the crank to a position about 25° past
TDC on the camshaft side.
Apply clean lubricating oil to the crankpin

bearing shell and journal. C
2. Carefully lift the connecting rod into the

crankcase by alternate use of the engine
room crane and the tackles attached to lift-
EN904-5.2 204 10 L0a

ing brackets A and B.
3. When the end of the connecting rod rests

on the crankpin journal, attach a tackle to
bracket C and the lower end of the connec-
ting rod. 3.
4. Turn the crankthrow towards BDC, past

TDC, while ‘following’ with the tackles and A B E
Shift tackle B from the lower end to the up-

per end of the connecting rod.
C
Attach a tackle to bracket E and the upper
end of the connecting rod.
Haul tight and remove the strap around the

EN904-5.4 204 03 L0a
connecting rod.
4.
A B E
C
EN904-5.4 204 04 L0a
C 4X-05482
Mounting
5. 5. Turn the crankthrow to 90° before BDC.
Shift tackle A from the lower end to the top

A B E of the connecting rod.
Remove the tackle at E.
Shift tackle B from the lifting attachment on

one side to the other side of the connecting
C
rod.
Remove the tackle at C and the wire guide

on the door frame.
EN904-5.4 204 05 L0a
Remove the lifting attachment at the lower

end of the connecting rod.
6. Turn the crankthrow towards TDC while

6. ‘following’ with the tackles.
A E Caution!
B
Take care that the studs do not damage

the crosshead bearing shell.
C 7. When the crank is in TDC, mount the

crankpin bearing cap.
EN904-5.4 204 06 L0a
7.
GN904-4.4 203 07
C 4X-05482
Mounting
8. Remove the four supports from the cross- 8.

head guides and the lifting attachments
from the connecting rod.
Turn the crosshead down far enough to fa-

cilitate the tightening of the nuts.
9. Tighten all four crosshead bearing cap nuts

simultaneously. See Data.
HN904-5.4 217 08 L0a

HN904-5.2 217 01 9.
C 4X-05482
S60MC-C Connecting Rod and Crosshead Panel Plate P90451-0126Ma
Plate
When referring to this page, please quote Plate P90451 Edition 0126Ma Page 1 (6)
C 4X-05482
Plate P90451-0126Ma Connecting Rod and Crosshead Panel S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
047 Wire guide *) (04A16)
059 Lifting attachment 04B12
060 Lifting tool for crosshead 04A15
072 Chain for suspension of piston 04A11
084 Retaining tool for telescope pipe 04A55
096 Bracket for support of crosshead 04A12
106 Bracket for support of crosshead 04A12
214 Torque wrench offset tool 04A86
*) Optional extras
Page 2 (6) When referring to this page, please quote Plate P90451 Edition 0126Ma
C 4X-05482
S60MC-C Connecting Rod - Tools Plate P90461-0048M
C 4X-05482
Plate P90461-0048M Connecting Rod - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
016 Hydraulic tools for crosshead bearing, -
and axial vibration damper
028 Spacer ring 04A02
053 O-ring with back-up ring, 110/120 mm 04A03
077 Stud setter for crosshead bearing stud 04A87
089 Hydraulic tools for crankpin bearing -
and end chock bolts
090 Hydraulic jack 04B01
100 Spacer ring 04B02
112 O-ring with back-up ring, 150/160 mm 04B03
148 Stud setter for crankpin bearing stud 04B87
C 4X-05482
S60MC-C Connecting Rod - Tools Plate P90462-0031Ma
When referring to this page, please quote Plate P90462 Edition 0031Ma Page 5 (6)
C 4X-05482
Plate P90462-0031Ma Connecting Rod - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
011 Guide shoe extractor, complete 04A52
059 Lifting tool for crankshaft shell 04B15
M1 Cover for crosshead 04A68
Page 6 (6) When referring to this page, please quote Plate P90462 Edition 0031Ma
C 4X-05482
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C Crankshaft Deflection 105-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0003
105-1 Crankshaft Deflection
X Stopped engine Slippy surface and risk of falling

Shut off fuel oil
Data
When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet D10501 Edition 0003M Page 1 (2)
4X-04329
105-1 Crankshaft Deflection S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet D10501 Edition 0003M
4X-04329
S60MC-C Crankshaft Deflection 905-1.1
Checking
Crankshaft Deflection
S60MC-C
0207
Checking
905-1.1
1.
Crankshaft deflection readings should be taken
while the ship is afloat (i.e. not while in dry
dock).
As the alignment is influenced by the engine

temperature as well as the loading conditions,
the deflection measurements should, for
comparison, always be made under nearly the
same temperature and load conditions.
1. Place a dial gauge axially in the crankthrow

opposite the crankpin, as illustrated on the
HM905-2.0 46 01 L0a
sketch. The correct mounting position is
marked with punch marks on the
crankthrow. See also Chapter 708 in Vol. 1.
2. “Closing” of the crankthrow (compression of

the gauge) is regarded as negative.
2.
3. Set the dial gauge to zero at the B2 side
near BDC. Whilst turning anti-clockwise,
make the readings for instance when the
throw passes the positions:
B2 (near bottom)
E (exhaust side)
T (top)
C (camshaft side)
B1 (near bottom)
1/2 (B2+B1) = B
XZ905-1.1 204 02
3.
XZ905-1.1 204 03 L0a
4X-04329
905-1.1 Crankshaft Deflection S60MC-C
Checking
4. 4. When taking deflection readings for the

three aftmost cylinders, the turning gear
should, at each stoppage, be turned a little
backwards to ease off the tangential
pressure on the turning wheel teeth. This
pressure may otherwise falsify the
readings.
If the crankshaft deflection (alignment

indicator) is approaching the tolerance
limits (see Vol. 1 “OPERATION”), the
bearing shells of the two adjacent main
bearings must be dismantled and
inspected.
See Procedure 905-2.3 for overhaul of
main bearing.
If the bearing shells are found to be in good

order, please contact MITSUI ENGINEER-
ING & SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD. for
checking of the bedplate alignment.
HM905-2.0 46 01 L0a
If the excessive crankshaft deflection is

found at the aftmost cylinder of the engine,
also the alignment of the propeller shaft/
drive shaft must be checked by a jack-up
test.
4X-04329
S60MC-C Main Bearing 105-2
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0025
105-2 Main Bearing
X Stopped engine Slippy surface and risk of falling

Shut off fuel oil 2 x 1000 kg

x2
Data
4 x 1,5 m
Ref. Description Value Unit 1x3m
D-1 Top clearance in main bearing
See Vol. 1 “OPERATION”.
D-3 Main bearing cap 470 kg
D-4 Upper bearing shell 35 kg

2 x 1000 kg
D-5 Lower bearing shell 36 kg 2 x 1000 kg
D-6 Dismantling 150-165 MPa

- hydraulic pressure (1500-1650 bar)
D-7 Tightening 150 MPa

- hydraulic pressure (1500 bar)
4X-04329
105-2 Main Bearing S60MC-C
Data
4X-04329
S60MC-C Main Bearing 905-2.1
Checking
Main Bearing
S60MC-C
0227
Checking
905-2.1
1.
1. If there is too large a difference in the
crankshaft deflection readings (autolog),
see Procedure 905-1.1, check the
individual bearings.
2. Calibrate the main bearing measuring tool:
Insert the measuring tool in the calibration

block.
Set the dial-gauge to 0 (zero).
GN905-2.1 204 01 L0a

Remove the screws for the lub. oil pipe
from the main bearing cap.
Insert the measuring tool and check the

clearance between the upper shell and the
journal.
2.
Note!
The bearing clearances for a new

bearing, as stated in Data, are for
guidance only. D-1
3. The difference between the actual
clearance measurement and the
measurement recorded in the Adjustment
Sheet (or the clearance noted for a new
bearing installed later) must not exceed
HN905-2.1 204 03
0.10 mm. If it does, see Vol. 1,

OPERATION, Chapter 708.
For evaluation of the bearing, see also Vol.

1, OPERATION, Chapter 708. 3.
If the bearing needs to be disassembled for

inspection, see Procedure 905-2.2.
Instructions
Operation
HN905-2.1 227 03
4X-04329
905-2.2 Main Bearing S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
905-2.2
Thrust shaft and journal bearing Dismantling of Main Bearing
The bearings are divided into two categories:
A. the main bearings
B. the thrust shaft end journal bearing

(the aftmost bearing).
Check and write down the top clearances

HN905-2.2 227 00
before carrying out any dismantling.

A
B
1. Disconnect the lubricating oil inlet pipe from
Main bearings the main pipe.
1. Turn the crankthrow to 80° after TDC.

E
Note!
Be sure that the crosshead for the

neighbouring cylinder is in a higher
position than for the cylinder you are
working on, otherwise it will be
impossible to lift the cap.
2. Mount pulley E on the web plate above the

bearing cap.
HN905-2.2 227 01
3. Pulley E is used to lift the main bearing cap

vertically and free of the bearing studs.
3.
HN905-2.2 227 03
4X-04329
Dismantling
4. Remove the stop screw from below the 4.

guide shoe and mount the other pully F in
tyhe bottom of the guide shoe.
5. Pulley F is used in combination with pulley

E, to lift the bearing cap free of the web
plate, the guides and the crankthrow.
6. Mount an eye bolt on the opposite web

plate.
F
The eye bolt is used in connection with a E
pull lift, to keep the main bearing cap clear
HN905-2.2 227 04
of the guides when it is lifted out of the
engine.
5.
C
E A
HN905-2.2 227 05
6.
HN905-2.2 227 06
4X-04329
Dismantling
7. 7. Mount tackles in the following positions:

B
A. Suspended from a wire strap below the
crane beam. Adjust the suspension
(fore-aft position) to ensure that chains
and wire ropes go free of guides and
crosshead.
A
B. In the lifting bracket in the top of the
crankcase, camshaft side.
C. In the lifting bracket below the

doorway.
HN905-2.2 227 07
C D. In the eye bolt on the web plate

opposite the pulleys.
Mount the wire guide in the top of the

8. doorway.
8. Assemble the main bearing hydraulic jacks

on the bearing studs. Connect the hydraulic
pump.
Loosen the nuts.
Remove the hydraulic main bearing tools

from the engine.
Unscrew and remove the nuts from the

main bearing studs.

Procedure 913-1.
D-6
GN913-1.0 203 22
4X-04329
Dismantling
9. Mount the main bearing lifting tool on the 9.

main bearing cap, and place the wire rope
as shown.
10. Attach tackle A to the wire rope and

carefully lift the main bearing cap clear of
the studs.
11. The lifting tool has one free wire rope.
Place this wire rope around the wheel of

pulley F mounted in the guide shoe. Hook
the wire rope on to the chain of tackle C.
HN905-2.2 227 09 10.
D-3
C
HN905-2.2 22710
11.
F
C
HN905-2.2 227 11
4X-04329
Dismantling
12. 12. Tighten tackle C and release tackle A, until

the main bearing cap is suspended
F vertically below pulley F.
C 13. Release tackle A from the wire rope of the

lifting tool. Remove the wire rope of the
A lifting tool from pulley E mounted on the
web plate.
Mount the short wire rope with two shackles

on the main bearing cap lifting tool.
14. Hook the chain of tackle D on to the short

HN905-2.2 227 12
wire rope mounted on the main bearing

lifting tool.
Tighten tackle D and release tackle C at the

same time, to get the bearing cap clear of
13. the guides.
F
C
HN905-2.2 227 13
14.
F
C
D
HN905-2.2 227 14
4X-04329
Dismantling
15. Hook the chain of tackle B on to the free 15.

wire rope of the main bearing lifting tool.
B
Attach the hook of tackle A around the wire
rope of the main bearing lifting tool (tackle
B).
Tighten tackle A to pull the wire rope of the A

main bearing lifting tool clear of the guide
shoe.
Note!
HN905-2.2 227 15
Make sure that the wire rope of the main C
bearing lifting tool does not scrape
against the edges of the guide shoe.
16.
16. Tighten tackle B and release tackle C at the
same time. B
Remove tackle D when the bearing cap is

free of the guides in tackles B and C.
17. When the main bearing cap is hanging A

vertically below tackle B, remove tackle C
and the wire rope around pulley F.
Remove the hook of tackle A from the wire

rope of tackle B.
HN905-2.2 227 16
Attach tackle A to the short wire rope on the

main bearing cap lifting tool. C
17.
B
A
HN905-2.2 227 17
4X-04329
Dismantling
18. 18. Lift the bearing cap out of the engine and
land it on the gallery.
19. Mount the bearing shell lifting tool on the

upper main bearing shell and remove the
shell from the engine, using pulley F.
20. If the crankshaft is turned with the bearing

cap dismounted, use the two stops to
prevent the lower shell from being rolled
out.
If not already done, check that there is

HN905-2.2 227 18
clearance between the journal and the main

bearing shell in the two adjacent main
bearings.
19.
D-4
HN905-2.2 227 19
20.
MB905-3.0 90 12
4X-04329
Dismantling
21. Remove the screws from the crosspiece 21.

(only screwed in for safe keeping) and
screw them into the threaded holes of the
hydraulic jacks for tightening the holding-
down bolts.
22. Place the crosspiece in the bedplate with

the ends resting on the cross girders, and
position the hydraulic jacks beneath the
crank webs as shown.
Tighten the screws against the crank webs

and compress the jacks.
Connect the hydraulic jacks to the high-

pressure pump, and raise the pressure until
the crankshaft has been lifted 0.2-0.5 mm,
but max. the clearance in the two adjacent
bearings.
If a higher lift is needed, loosen the both

adjacent main bearing caps.
Note down the pressure for later reference.

MB905-3.0 118 12
22.
KN905-2.2 238 27
4X-04329
Dismantling
23. 23. Check that there is min. 0.1 mm clearance

between journal and bearing shell, or be-
tween bearing shell and main bearing sup-
port, on both sides of the journal.
Note!
The feeler blade must be inserted mini-

mum 60 mm into the gap to pass the bore
relief in the bearing shell.
If the clearance is less than 0.1 mm, move

KN905-2.2 238 28
the crosspiece sideways until clearance is

obtained at both side. The pressure must
be dropped to 0 (zero) bar when moving the
crosspiece. Normally, adjustment needs to
24. be 50-150 mm to the exhaust side (the side
where the clearance is missing).
Note!
The lower shell must be lifted out to the

side with the most clearance, which is
normally the fuel pump side.
24. If re-positioning of the crosspiece does not

ensure a vertical lift, place a 5-ton jack
KN905-2.2 238 25 L0a
between the side wall and the crank throw,

to correct the journal position in this way.
If it is available, note down the pressure ap-

plied to the jack. This data is used to en-
sure that the crankshaft is in the same
25. position when the new bearing is installed.
Note!
It is recommended that the crankshaft lift-

ing tool is only removed if it is urgently
necessary and then only after the main
bearing shell has been reinstalled.
25. Dismount the locking screws.

KN905-2.2 238 26
Place the dismantling tool on top of the low-

er bearing shell. Make sure that the flap on
the dismantling tool enters the oil groove in
the bearing shell.
4X-04329
Dismantling
26. Pull the lower shell around and up until it 26.

lies over the main bearing journal. Never
use a tackle larger than 0.5 tonne.
Note!
While pulling out the shell, it is recom-

mended to hold a foot or hand on the
wire rope, to tighten it up and to observe
whether the shell is sticking.
27. Take the lower shell out of engine in the

same way as the upper shell, using the lift-
ing tool.
JM905-2.2 236 27
28. If it proves necessary, replace the bearing
shells with new ones.

shell, see Vol. 1 OPERATION, Chapter 708 27.
“Bearings”.
D-5
HN905-2.2 227 19
4X-04329
Overhaul
Overhaul
905-2.3
1. 1. Clean and inspect the bearing shells. For

2. judging the condition of the bearing, see
Vol. 1, Chapter 708, ‘Bearings’.
If a bearing is damaged and replacement of

one or two bearing shells is necessary,
contact MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIP-
BULDING CO., LTD. for advice.
2. Before remounting:
• Check the bearing support for damage

and burrs. If damage is found, contact
MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIPBULD-
ING CO., LTD. for advice.
• Make sure that all parts are clean, use

GN905-2.3 204 01
non-fluffy cloth to clean between journal

and main bearing support.
• Lubricate the bearing journal, the main

bearing support and the back of the
lower shell.
4X-04329
Mounting
Mounting
905-2.4
1. Clean and lubricate the journal, the lower 1.

bearing shell and the bearing support with
clean oil.
Place the dismantling tool between the

bearing journal and the bearing support.
Place the guide tool for the lower bearing

shell on the main bearing support.
2. Using the bearing shell lifting tool, the

pulleys and tackles, lift the lower bearing
shell into the crankcase and land it on the
HN905-2.4 227 01
crankshaft journal. Remove the lifting tool
from the bearing shell.
Check that the hydraulic pressure to the

crosspiece jacks corresponds to the
pressure used when the lower shell was 2.
removed, and that the crankshaft is still
lifted max. 0.2 mm.
3. Using the dismantling tool, lower the

bearing shell down between journal and
support.
Remove the dismantling tool and push the D-5

shell entirely down with a piece of wood, for
instance a hammer handle.
To ensure that the shell is correctly

mounted, check that the distance from the
HN905-2.2 227 19
main bearing support to the shell is equal

in both sides.
3.
HN905-2.4 227 03
4X-04329
Mounting
4. 4. Remove the guide tool when the lower

bearing shell has been mounted.
Mount the locking screws in the bearing

support.
Check with a feeler gauge that there is

clearance around the head of the locking
screws, to ensure correct centering of the
bearing shell.
5. Lower the crankshaft and remove the

hydraulic jacks and the crosspiece from
below the crankshaft.
XZS905-13 07
Wipe the contact surfaces between the

upper and the lower bearing shells clean
with a non-fluffy piece of cloth.
6.
6. Land the upper bearing shell on the main
journal in the same way as the lower
D-4 bearing shell.
Make sure that none of the edges of the

upper bearing shell are resting on the edge
of the bearing support.
If necessary, place the special tool between

the studs and press the shell into place.
Clean the contact surfaces between the

bearing support and the bearing cap. Make
sure that no oil is left on the contact
XZS905-13 09
surfaces.
7. Mount the lifting tool on the bearing cap.

7. Using the lifting tool and the tackles, lift the
bearing cap into the crankcase in the
reverse order to dismantling.
See Procedure 905-2.2, steps 18-17.
HN905-2.2 227 18
D-3
4X-04329
Mounting
8. Using the pulleys mounted inside the 8.

crankcase, move the bearing cap into B
position vertically above the main bearing
upper shell in the reverse order to
dismantling.
See Procedure 905-2.2, steps 16-10.
A
9. Land the bearing cap carefully on the upper
bearing shell, using the bearing cap lifting
tool.
Check that the spring pin in the support

enters the hole in the bearing cap.
HN905-2.4 227 08
Take care not to displace the upper bearing
shell. C
Remove the lifting tool from the bearing

cap. 9.
Screw the nuts on to the main bearing

studs.
Using a tommy bar, tighten in small

alternate steps the nuts on both sides of the
bearing cap.
10. Assemble the main bearing hydraulic jacks

on the bearing studs.
HN905-2.4 227 09
10.
GN9913-1.0 203 22
4X-04329
Mounting
11. 11. Connect the hydraulic jacks to the high-

pressure pump by means of the distributor
block and high-pressure hoses.
Bleed the hydraulic system and raise the

pressure as indicated in Data.
Using the hydraulic jacks, fully tighten the

D-7 nuts on both sides of the bearing cap.
For tightening pressure, see Data.

Procedure 913-1.
12. Remove all tools from the engine.
Mount the lubricating oil pipe on the main

bearing cap.
HN905-2.4 227 11 L0a
13. Measure the bearing clearance.

12.
HN905-2.1 204 03 L0a
4X-04329
S60MC-C Thrust Bearing 105-3
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0022
105-3 Thrust Bearing
X Engage turning gear (while engine being turned)
2 x 1.5 m, 1 x 3 m
Shut off fuel oil M12

X Shut off lubricating oil M10

2 x 900 kg
Data
D-1 Stopper - fore 48 kg 500 kg
D-2 Stopper - aft 37 kg
D-3 Thrust bearing segment 48 kg


4X-04329
105-3 Thrust Bearing S60MC-C
Data
4X-04329
S60MC-C Thrust Bearing 905-3.1
Checking
Thrust Bearing
S60MC-C
0207
Checking
905-3.1
1.
The clearance in the thrust bearing was
measured during testbed trials of the engine
and noted down in the ‘Adjustment Sheet'
which is inserted at the front of Vol. 1
“OPERATION”.
For a new engine the clearance is 0.5-1.0 mm,

and for an engine in service it must not exceed
2.0 mm.
For dismantling the segment stopper, see
Procedure 905-3.2.
1. There is a wear groove of 1 mm in the

uppermost thrust segment (The segment
with thermometers).
Insert the feeler gauge in this groove on the

foremost side of the thrust collar.
HN905-3.1 207 01
If a feeler gauge of 0.1 mm is not able to

enter the wear groove, the thrust bearing
must be overhauled.
4X-04329
905-3.2 Thrust Bearing S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
905-3.2
1. 1. Remove the end cover of the engine.
Remove the lub. oil pipe from the thrust

segments.
If necessary, remove the lub. oil pipe for the

aftmost main bearing shell.
2. Remove the protective shields from the

thrust collar.
Loosen and remove the nuts from the

segment stoppers.
Procedure 913-1.
Remove the studs for stopper after loosing

them by means of W nuts.
Screw an eye bolt into the stoppers that are

to be removed.
HN905-3.2 207 01
Suspend a tackle above each stoppers and

hook the tackle on to the eye bolt.
Remove the stoppers from the chain drive

above the thrust segments ( AHEAD or
2. ASTERN ) that are to be taken out.
D-4
HN905-3.2 207 02
4X-04329
Dismantling
3. Suspend a tackle from the chain tightener 3.

bracket above the segments which are to
be removed.
For turning-up the thrust segments, mount

the segment tool on the chainwheel.
4. Turn up the segments by turning the

engine, and remove them from the chain
casing.
HN905-3.2 207 03
4.
HN905-3.2 207 04
4X-04329
905-3.4 Thrust Bearing S60MC-C
Mounting
Mounting
905-3.4
1. 1. Suspend a tackle from the chain tightener

bracket above the segments which are to
be mounted.
Mount the segment tool on the chainwheel.
Land the segment on the journal and

remove the eye bolt from the segment.
Turn the shaft a little. Land the next

segment. Repeat this process until all
segments have been mounted.
2. After the last segment has been mounted,

turn the segment tool up and dismount it.
GN905-3.4 204 01
2.
GN905-3.4 204 02
4X-04329
Mounting
3. Mount the protective shields for the thrust 5.

collar.
4. After mounting the segment stoppers, the

studs for stopper are tightened in place by
means of W nuts.
Mount the hydraulic jacks and tighten the

nuts on the stoppers. See Data.
5. Mount the lub. oil pipe for the thrust

segments.
6. If dismantled, mount the lub. oil pipe for the

aftmost main bearing.
7. Mount the end cover. Make sure that all

screws marked A are tightened before
tightening the screws marked B. HN905-3.2 207 05
6.
HN905-2.4 208 07
4X-04329
S60MC-C Journal Bearing 105-4
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0001
105-4 Journal Bearing
Shut off fuel oil 2 x 2000 kg

4 x 1,5 m
1x3m
Data
D-1 Top clearance in main bearing

See Vol. 1 “OPERATION”.
D-3 Main bearing cap 470 kg
D-4 Upper bearing shell 35 kg
D-5 Lower bearing shell 36 kg 2 x 1000 kg


4X-04329
105-4 Journal Bearing S60MC-C
Data
4X-04329
S60MC-C Journal Bearing 905-4.1
Checking
Journal Bearing
S60MC-C
201
Checking
905-4.1
2.
1. Visually examine the sides of the bearing
shell on the whole circumference as far as
possible. Check for squeezed-out or
loosened metal on the bearing shell edge,
also look for white metal fragments in the
oil pan.
2. Calibrate the main bearing measuring tool:

D-1
Insert the measuring tool in the calibration
block.
Set the dial-gauge to 0 (zero).
HN905-2.1 204 03
Remove the screws for the lub. oil pipe
from the main bearing cap.
Insert the measuring tool and check the

clearance between the upper shell and the 3.
journal.
Note!
The bearing clearances for a new

bearing, as stated in Data, are for
guidance only.
3. The difference between the actual

clearance measurement and the
measurement recorded in the Adjustment
Sheet (or the clearance noted for a new
bearing installed later) must not exceed
0.10 mm. If it does or if the inspection
specified above in step one indicates the
HN905-2.1 227 03
need, the main bearing must be

disassembled for inspection. See
Procedure 905-2.2.
For evaluation of the bearing, see Vol. 1

“OPERATION”, Chapter 708, ‘Bearings’.
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 905-4.1 Edition 201M Page 1 (11)
4X-04329
905-4.2 Journal Bearing S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
905-4.2
Thrust shaft and journal bearing Dismantling of journal bearing in the thrust
shaft end.
Check and write down the top clearances

before carrying out any dismantling.
1. Remove the screws from the cover placed

over the thrust bearing. Attach a shackle
and wire rope to the cover. Hook on a
tackle and lift the cover away.
HN905-2.2 227 00
2. Disconnect the lubricating oil pipe used for

A lubricating the bearing.
B
Main bearings Mount the lifting tools for journal bearing
cap as shown.
1.
Turn the crank web for the aftmost cylinder
to TDC.
NA905-2.2 215 24
2.
JN905-4.2 207 02
Page 2 (11) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 905-4.2 Edition 201M
4X-04329
Dismantling
3. Assemble the main bearing hydraulic jacks 3.

on the bearing studs and connect the
hydraulic pump.
Loosen the nuts, using a tommy bar.

D-6
Procedure 913-1.
4. Remove the hydraulic tools from the

engine. Unscrew and remove the nuts from
the bearing studs.
GN913-1 203 22
Suspend a tackle from lifting tool B and
hook the tackle to the lifting tool.
HN905-4.2 201 04 4.
5.
B
HN905-4.2 201 05 L0a
4X-04329
Dismantling
6. 6. Lift the bearing cap with tackle B. Attach a

wire rope to the hook of the engine room
crane C and the lifting tool on the bearing
D-3 B
cap.
7. Lift with the engine room crane and release

tackle B simultaneously.
8. Lift the bearing cap out of the engine and

land it on a couple of wooden planks.
HN905-4.2 201 06 L0a
7. C
B
HN905-4.2 201 07 L0a
8.
HN905-4.2 201 08 L0a
4X-04329
Dismantling
9. Mount the lifting attachment on the upper 9.

shell, and lift the shell out of the engine.
10. Place the crosspiece under the turning

wheel as shown. Mount a dial gauge to
measure the lift of the crankshaft. Connect
the hydraulic jack to the high-pressure
pump and raise the pressure until the
D-4
crankshaft has lifted max. 0.2 mm.
11. Dismount the lock screws from the lower

bearing shell.
NA905-2.2 215 32
Place the dismantling tool on the top of the
lower bearing shell, making sure that the
flap of the dismantling tool enters the oil
groove in the bearing shell.
Pull the lower bearing shell round and 10.

upwards until it lies over the bearing
journal.
Take out the lower shell from the crankcase

in the same way as the upper shell.
Note!
Never remove the tools for lifting the

crankshaft before remounting the lower
main bearing shell.
NA905-2.2 215 33

shell, see Vol. 1 “OPERATION”, Chapter
708 ‘Bearings’.
11.
MB905-3.1 106 18
4X-04329
Overhaul
Overhaul
905-4.3
1. 1. Clean and inspect the bearing shells. For

2. judging the condition of the bearing, see
Vol. 1, Chapter 708, ‘Bearings’.
If a bearing is damaged, and replacement

of one or two bearing shells is necessary,
BULDING CO., LTD. for advice.
2. Before remounting:
• Check the bearing support for damage

and burrs. If damage is found, contact
MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIPBULD-
ING CO., LTD. for advice.
• Make sure that all parts are clean, use

GN905-2.3 204 01
non-fluffy cloth to clean between journal

and bearing support.
• Lubricate the bearing journal, the bearing

support and the back of the lower shell.
4X-04329
Mounting
Mounting
905-4.4
1. Lubricate the journal, the lower bearing 1.

shell and the bearing support with clean oil.
Place the dismantling tool between the

bearing journal and the bearing support.
Place the guide tool for the lower bearing

shell on the bearing support.
2. Using the bearing shell lifting tool, the

pulleys and tackles, lift the lower bearing
shell into the crankcase and land it on the
crankshaft journal.
HN905-2.4 227 01
shell.
Check that the hydraulic pressure to the

crosspiece jack corresponds to the 2.
pressure used when the lower shell was
removed and that the crankshaft is still
lifted max. 0.2 mm.
3. Using the dismantling tool, rotate the

bearing shell and push it down between
journal and support.
Remove the dismantling tool and push the

shell into its proper position with a piece of
wood, for instance a hammer handle.
To ensure that the shell is correctly

NA905.2.2 215 32
mounted, check that the distance from the

main bearing support to the shell is equal
in both sides.
3.
HN905-2.4 227 03
4X-04329
Mounting
4. 4. Remove the guide tool when the lower

bearing shell has been mounted.
Mount the locking screws in the bearing

support.
Check with a feeler gauge that there is a

clearance around the head of the locking
screws, to ensure the correct centering of
the bearing shell.
5. Lower the crankshaft and remove the

hydraulic jack and the crosspiece from
under the turning wheel.
XZS905-13 07
Wipe the contact surfaces between the

upper and the lower bearing shells clean
with a non-fluffy piece of cloth.
4X-04329
Mounting
6. Land the upper bearing shell on the main 6.

journal, in the same way as the lower
bearing shell.
D-4
Make sure that none of the edges of the
upper bearing shell are resting on the edge
of the bearing support.
If necessary, place the special tool between

the studs and press the shell into place.
Clean the contact surfaces between the

bearing support and the bearing cap. Make
sure that no oil is left on the contact
XZS905-13 09
surfaces.

Using the engine room crane and the
tackle, lift the bearing cap into the 7.
crankcase in reverse order to dismantling.
D-3
8. Land the bearing cap carefully on the upper
bearing shell.
Check that the spring pin in the support

enters the hole in the bearing cap. Take
care not to displace the upper bearing shell.

cap.
HN905-4.4 201 07 L0a
Screw the nuts on to the bearing studs.
8.
HN905-4.4 201 08 L0a
4X-04329
Mounting
9. 9. Assemble the main bearing hydraulic jacks

on the bearing studs.
10. Connect the hydraulic jacks to the high-

pressure pump by means of the distributor
block and high-pressure hoses.

pressure as indicated in Data.
Using the hydraulic jacks, fully tighten the

nuts on both sides of the bearing cap.
For tightening pressure, see Data.
GN913-1 203 22

Procedure 913-1.
11. Remove all tools from the engine.

10.
Mount the lubricating oil pipe.
D-7
HN905-4.4 201 10 L0a
11.
HN905-4.4 201 11
4X-04329
Mounting
12. Measure the bearing clearance. See 12.

Procedure 905-4.1.
13. Mount the end cover.
D-1
HN905-2.1 204 03 L0a 13.
D-4
HN905-4.4 201 13
4X-04329
S60MC-C Axial Vibration Damper 105-5
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0006
105-5 Axial Vibration Damper
Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Damper housing, upper part 380 kg

- dismantling 150-165 MPa
(1500-1650 bar)
Hydraulic pressure
- tightening 150 MPa
(1500 bar)
D-3 Outer studs

D-4 Nuts on inner studs

or
1. tightening torque 100 Nm
2. tightening angle 160 °
D-5 Horizontal screws

or
1. tightening torque 100 Nm
2. tightening angle 30 °
D-6 Clearance at joints 6 mm
Calibration of springs:
Spring for the middle oil seal

L0 0 N.................. Check length 2322 mm
L1 70±8 N............ Check length 3265 mm
L2 105±12 N........ Check length 3750 mm
Spring for the side oil seals

L0 0 N.................. Check length 1679 mm
4X-04329
105-5 Axial Vibration Damper S60MC-C
Data
4X-04329
S60MC-C Axial Vibration Damper 905-5.1
Checking
Axial Vibration Damper
S60MC-C
0208
Checking
905-5.1
For checking the effectiveness of the axial vi- 1.

bration damper, it is necessary to measure the
longitudinal movements of the fore end of the
crankshaft during running.
The measurement (or reading) should be taken
at the same r/min as during the sea trials. (Pref-
erably 90% and 100% of MCR).
As different equipment may be mounted on the
specific engines, the checking procedure de-
scribes three systems:
A: Electronic, (with Axial Vibration Monitor)
B: Mechanical, (without angle encoder fore)
C: Mechanical, (with angle encoder fore)
A: Electronic, (with Axial Vibration Monitor)

A proximeter probe is built on to the lower part
of the damper housing. The probe is connected
to a control unit which displays peak-to-peak
movements and sends signals to the engine
control systems.
1. The peak-to-peak value displayed in mm on
the control unit should be periodically re-
corded and compared to the original ones
obtained during the sea trial and the value
GN905-5.1 204 06
given below.
If the peak-to-peak value is less than the
value shown below, overhaul of the damper
is not necessary.
Limits for permissible peak-to-peak values:
S60MC-C
Cyl. 4 5 6 7 8
mm 1.52 1.88 2.25 2.62 3.08
2. The alarm values which are set in the con-

trol system, are shown below.
The engine should not be operated contin-
uously over the value shown below.
Limits for permissible peak-to-peak values:
S60MC-C
Cyl. 4 5 6 7 8
mm 2.03 2.51 3.00 3.49 4.10
If the peak-to-peak value exceeds the Nor-

mal Service Value, it is necessary to over-
haul the axial vibration damper, see Proce-
dure 905-5.2.
4X-04329
905-5.1 Axial Vibration Damper S60MC-C
Checking
2. B: Mechanical, (without angle encoder fore)
1. When checking the effectiveness of the ax-

ial vibration damper in service (which is
recommended every 8000 hours and just
after overhauling of axial vibration damper),
a special measuring tool has to be mounted
in the shield on the forward end of the en-
gine, in order to measure the axial move-
ment of the crankshaft fore end.
The actual measurement obtained should

be compared with the original values ob-
GN905-5.1 204 02
tained during the sea trial, and with limits

given on the next page.
2. The followin procedure should be followed:
3. Stop the engine.

L1=228 mm
38 Unscrew the two plugs from the cover at
the front end of the engine.
05C73
3. Screw the shaft piece into the fore end of
the crankshaft, through the large hole in the
L0=38 mm cover.
Screw the measuring arm into the small

hole so that the arm is perpendicular to the
shaft piece. Tighten the lock nut.
GN905-5.1 204 03 L0a
4. Attach a pencil to the arm.
Magnification factor K=6

Note!
The distance to the end of the pencil

should only exceed the arm length by 38
mm, so that the magnification factor
K=L 1/L0 becomes 6.
4X-04329
Checking
5. The measurement should be taken at the 5.

same r/min as used during the sea trials
(preferably 90% and 100% of MCR).
Start the engine and hold the arm against

the shaft piece. Hold a paper block with a
solid backing plate by hand and moved
lightly downwards on the pencil.
To ensure a certain inertia, the backing

plate should have a mass of approx. 1-2 kg.
The axial movement recorded on the paper

block must be measured with a slide gauge
as shown in the sketch.
If the peak-to-peak distance a in mm does

not exceed the values given below, it is not
necessary to overhaul the damper.
Limits for peak-to-peak distance a (mm):

GN905-5.1 204 05
S60MC-C
Cyl. 4 5 6 7 8
mm 9.12 11.3 13.5 15.7 18.5
4X-04329
Checking
2. C: Mechanical, (with angle encoder fore)
1. When checking the effectiveness of the ax-

ial vibration damper in service (which is
recommended every 8000 hours), a special
measuring tool has to be mounted in the
shield on the forward end of the engine, in
order to measure the axial movement of the
crankshaft fore end.
The actual measurement obtained should

be compared with the original values ob-
tained during the sea trial, and with the lim-
its given on the next page.
2. The following procedure should be fol-

lowed:
Stop the engine.
Dismount the cover on top of the angle en-

coder housing at the front of the engine.
MN905-5.1 214 04 L0a
Apply Molykote TM on the side of the shaft

cam.
3. Mount the axial vibration measuring tool

with the screws from the cover.
3.
Attach a pencil to the arm.
Note!
The distance to the tip of the pencil

shoud only exceed the arm length by 42
mm, so that the magnification factor
K=L 1/L0 becomes.
L1 =
MN905-5.1 214 05 L0a
L0 =
4X-04329
Checking
4. The measurement should be taken at the 4.

same r/min as used during the sea trials
(preferably 90% and 100% of MCR).
Start the engine and pull the measuring

arm against the shaft cam with one hand.
With the other hand, move a sheet/block of
paper, clipped on to a solid backing plate,
lightly downwards against the tip of the
pencil.
To ensure a certain inertia, the backing

plate should have a mass of approx. 1-2 kg.
The axial movement recorded on the paper

block must be measured with a calliper as
shown in the sketch.
If the peak-to-peak distance a in mm does

not exceed the values given below, it is not
necessary to overhaul the damper.
MN905-5.1 214 06 L0a
Limits for peak-to-peak distance a (mm):
S60MC-C
Cyl. 4 5 6 7 8
mm 9.12 11.3 13.5 15.7 18.5
4X-04329
Dismantling
Dismantling
905-5.2
1. 1. Dismantling of the axial vibration damper is

carried out from cyl. No. 1 or from the front
end of the engine.
Disconnect and remove the oil pipes from

the foremost bearing cap and the axial vi-
bration damper housing.
Loosen and remove the screws and nuts

from the damper housing upper part.
2. Only the upper part of the housing needs to

be removed, while the lower half remains
GN905-5.2 204 01
mounted on the bedplate.
Mount a lifting eye bolt on the upper part.
3. By means of tackle and wire rope, separate

2. and raise the upper part of the damper
housing to a position in which it is possible
to change the oil seals and springs.
Keep the upper part in position by inserting

two screws in the damper housing.
GN905-5.2 204 02
3.
GN905-5.2 204 03
4X-04329
Overhaul
Overhaul
905-5.3
1. Dismantle and remove the springs from the 1.

seal rings. 2. seal ring(longer half ring)
Remove and discard the seal rings.
2. When mounting new seal rings, the follow- (1)

ing procedure should be done in order to
spring
assemble the damper without damaging the
seal rings.
(1) Mark the center of the back side of

each of the longer half ring with paint.
damper housing
Insert the longer half ring and the (lower part)
springs into the lower part of the hous-
ing. (2) Take care to ensure the direction
of joints and the clearance at Cam
and Exhaust side are the same.
NB!
Each seal ring consists of 2 parts. The

longer part will be called the longer half B A
ring. The other will be called the shorter
half ring.
(2) Connect the shorter half ring to the

longer half ring with the springs. Take
care to ensure the direction of joints
and the clearances at Cam and Ex- D-6
haust side are the same.
The springs can be hooked in place. A B
Be certain that they are aligned in the
center of the groove of the seal ring.
(3) Set the seal rings
in the correct
(3) Before the upper parts of the damper position by
housing are mounted, it is necessary to turning.
set the seal rings in the correct posi-
tion. This is done by turning the seal
rings 180 degrees.
Mark(white paint)
NB!
The engine turning system must be used

to rotate the seal rings. They may not be a=b
rotated by hand.
a b
Stop turning the seal rings when the white

mark on the longer half ring is located at the
HG905-5.3 204M 01 A0a
top. At this point, the shorter half ring is in

seal ring
the lower part of the damper housing and
the joints are located in the positions indi- (shorter half ring)
cated in figure (1).
4X-04329
Mounting
Mounting
905-5.4
1. 1. Unscrew/release the upper part of the

damper housing.
It is recommended that the fitting bolts be

inserted before mouting the damper on the
bed plate. In some instances, the fitting
Insert the bolts cannot be inserted after mounting the
fitting damper on the bed plate due to limited
bolts space.
before
mounting The upper part of the damper should be
lowered slowly, while pushing it against the
Push contact surface of the bed plate. The upper
part of the damper housing must not con-
tact the seal rings. If there is a rake in the
ship, the inclination must be considered
when mounting the upper part of the damp-
er housing.
NB!
If it is difficult to align the upper and lower
parts of the damper, it is possible that the
seal ring is between the lower and upper
GN905-5.4 204 01 L0a
part of the damper. In this case, tap gen-

tly with a hammer in the direction of
Cam-Exhaust. Then allow the weight of
the upper part of the housing to align the
upper and lower parts of the damper
housing. Do not use force on the upper
2. part of the housing to force the housing
into position. If it is still difficult to align,
then dismount the upper part of the
damper once and confirm that the seal
rings are correctly set, and remount it.
D-4
Be aware of the two guide pins from the
lower part of the damper housing, which
ensure positioning the upper part.
D-2 If the studs have been removed, then
moust them again at this stage.
See Data.
D-5
2. Mount the horizontal screws.
Mount and tighten the nuts on the vertical

studs. See Data.
GN905-5.4 204 02
Caution!
It must be comtirmed the effectiveness of

the axial vibration damper by the mea-
surement (see 905-5.1), at the running
condition just after overhauling.
4X-04329
S60MC-C Cam Shaft, Thrust Shaft, Main Bearing, Etc. Panel Plate 90551-0202M
C 4X-04329
Plate 90551-0202M Cam Shaft, Thrust Shaft, Main Bearing, Etc. Panel S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
040 Pully for wire for main bearing 05A13
064 Pully for wire for main bearing 05A13
076 Lifting tool for main bearing cap 05A15
088 Dismantling tool for main bearing shell 05A52
090 Mounting tool for bearing shell 05A59
100 Tool for turning out segments 05B59
111 Liftng tool 05A14
123 Retaining tool for main bearing shells 05A50
135 Lifting tool for relief valve 11B71
147 Lifting tool for relief valve 11B72
159 Eye bolt 05A13
160 Wire 05A15
172 Mounting tool for thin bearing shell 05A58
184 Lifting tool for main bearing shell 05A12
*) Optional extras
C 4X-04329
S60MC-C Main Bearing - Tools Plate 90561-0064M
C 4X-04329
Plate 90561-0064M Main Bearing - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
045 Lifting tool 05A19
057 Nut 05A09
069 Hydraulic jack, upper 05A06
070 Extension stud 05A04
082 Supporting block 05A02
128 Hydraulic jack, lower 05A01
141 Hydraulic tool for main bearing, complete -
C 4X-04329
S60MC-C Cam Shaft - Tools Plate 90562-0092M
C 4X-04329
Plate 90562-0092M Cam Shaft - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
040 Lifting tool for crank shaft 05A51
M1 Lifting tool for journal bearing cap 05A20
C 4X-04329
S60MC-C Turning Wheel - Tools Plate 90563-0015M
C 4X-04329
Plate 90563-0015M Turning Wheel - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
105 Hydraulic jack 05B01
129 Spacer ring 05B02
142 Stud setter, M45 05B87
154 Hydraulic tools for segment stopper -
and holding-down bolt, complete
C 4X-04329
S60MC-C Crank Shaft - Measuring Tools Plate 90564-0016M
C 4X-04329
Plate 90564-0016M Crank Shaft - Measuring Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
016 Measuring tool for axial movement, 05C73
complete
028 Shaft piece (05C73)
041 Measuring arm (05C73)
C 4X-04329
S60MC-C Crank Shaft - Tools Plate 90564-0018M
C 4X-04329
Plate 90564-0018M Crank Shaft - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
016 Measuring tool for axial movement 05C73
C 4X-04329
S60MC-C Thrust Shaft - Tools Plate 90570-0001M
C 4X-04329
Plate 90570-0001M Thrust Shaft - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
019 Lifting tool for thrust shaft 05B53
C 4X-04329
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C Chain 106-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
08
106-1 Chain

Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Max. wear of teeth

on chain wheel for:
1” Chain 0.9 mm
4” Chain 3.5 mm
1” Chain
D-2 Original length

(chain pitch x 10 links) 238.2 mm
D-3 10 links measurements

+ 1% of a tensioned chain
= scrapping of chain 240.5 mm
4” Chain
D-4 Original length

(chain pitch x 10 links) 952.5 mm
D-5 10 links measurements

+ 1% of a tensioned chain
= scrapping of chain 962.0 mm
When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet 106-1 Edition 08M Page 1 (2)
C 4X-08280
106-1 Chain S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet 106-1 Edition 08M
C 4X-08280
S60MC-C Chains 906-1.1
Checking
Chains
S60MC-C
209
Checking
906-1.1
4.
Carry out the inspection as follows:
1. Make a general inspection for loose bolts

and screws.
2. Inspect lube oil pipes for damage, and

check jet nozzles for possible stoppages or
deformations.
3. Examine the rubber track of the guideways

for cracks or other damage.
Replace the guideway if bits have started to

be “plucked out” of the rubber track.
4. Check the teeth of the chain wheels. If ab-

normal wear is found, take a measurement
(see Data).
Measurements are best taken by placing a

short straight-edge over points A and B and
then measuring the distance D-1.
GN906-1.1 202 04
5. If abnormal wear is observed at the bottom

of the teeth, make a drawing in scale 1:1 of
the teeth and wear profile.
Measure the geometry of the bottom and 5.

note down all available measurements in-
cluding D-A and D-B on the drawing. D-B
is best found by placing a short straight-
edge between the tip of the two teeth.
For assessing the measurement results,

BUILDING CO., LTD.
In most cases, scratches caused by the

side plates of the chain will be found on the
sides of the teeth. Such scratches can gen-
erally be considered normal.
GN906-1.1 203 05
C 4X-08280
906-1.1 Chains S60MC-C
Checking
7. 6. Check the chains for cracks on possibly

defective rollers and side plates.
Check that the chain rollers can run freely

and that the chain links can freely move on
the pin and bushing (that they are not
D-2 “seized” between the pin and the bushing).
It is normal, however, that the rollers get

light, circumferential scratches during the
D-3 running-in period. These fine scratches are
of no importance and need not be consid-
ered.
It is recommended that each single link is

checked.
7. Check chain wear by measuring the length

of 10 chain links and comparing the result
with the value given in Data.
D-4 If necessary, adjust the chain tighteners.

See Procedure 906-2.3 or 906-7.3.
D-5
HM906-1.0 32 00
C 4X-08280
Disassembling
Disassembling
906-1.2
It may become necessary to disassemble 2.

the chain if, for instance, cracked rollers or
seizures between pin and bushing have
been discovered during the inspection.
Note!
Every time a chain link is disassembled,

a new link must always be fitted as the
link pin press-fit is destroyed when
breaking the chain.
When a new link is fitted in one chain, the

corresponding link in the other chain
must also be renewed.
Disassembling the 4” Chain
1. Remove the tension on the chain by loos-

ening the chain tightener.
GN906-1.2 203 02
Turn the engine until the slack part of the

chain, with the chain link that is to be dis-
assembled, is in a favourable position for 3.
the work.
2. Mount a wire round the link rollers a short

distance from the disassembly point, and
tighten the wire lightly with a tackle.
Protect the link rollers over which the wire

is wrapped.
Note!
If the chain is to be completely removed,

BUILDING CO., LTD. for further informa-
tion.
The riveting of the pins that are to be

pressed out is to be chiselled or ground
away.
GN906-1.2 203 03
3. Place the chain bursting tool over the outer

chain link, and dismantle the link by alter-
nately tightening the screws on the tool.
C 4X-08280
906-1.2 Chains S60MC-C
Disassembling
4. Disassembling the 1” Chain
4. Turn the chain link which is to be taken out

into a favourable position and remove the
riveting on the pin ends of the link. Lash
together the chain links on each side of the
link being taken out to hold them together.
Now slacken off the chain.
Position the chain bursting device and

disassemble the chain in the same way as
described for the 4” chain.
HM906.2.3 62 05
C 4X-08280
Assembling
Assembling
906-1.4
Assembling the 4” Chain 1.
Before assembling the inner and outer

links, clean the pins and bushings.
1. Combine the inner chain link with the outer

chain link and mount the compression tool.
Force the loose side plate of the outer link

into place by alternately tightening the
screws on the compression tool.
2. When the link has been assembled, remove
GN906-1.4 203 01
the compression tool and lock the pin ends
by riveting.
Repeat this procedure until the chain has

been assembled.
3.
Remove the tackle and wire, and adjust the
chain tension.
(See Data and Procedure 906-2.3).
Assembling the 1” Chain
3. Put the side plate with pins in position in the

two inner links.
Place the assembling tool over the chain

link as shown in the illustration, positioning
the “loose” side plate over the pin ends.
HC906-2.3 87 06
Tighten the screw of the tool and, by this

means, the link plate is pressed down over
the pin ends.
When the parts are in place, remove the

tool and lashing, and lock the pin ends by
riveting.
Adjust the chain tension - see Data and

Procedure 906-7.3.
C 4X-08280
S60MC-C Chain Tightener 106-2
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
05
106-2 Chain Tightener

Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Clearance 0.1 mm
D-2 Tightening angle

(= 5.5 hexagons) 330 °
C 4X-08280
106-2 Chain Tightener S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-08280
S60MC-C Chain Tightener 906-2.3
Adjustment
Chain Tightener
S60MC-C
206
Adjustment
906-2.3
1.
1. To retighten the chains, loosen nuts A, B,
C and D to free the chain tightener bolt.
2. Turn the engine so that the slack part of the

chains is on the same side as the tightener
wheel.
3. Tighten nut B on the chain tightener bolt

until there is a clearance between the shaft
and the nut as stated in D-1.
Then tighten nut B as stated in D-2 (see

Data).
GN906-2.3 203 01
HN906-2.1 206 01 2.
3. D-2
D-1
GN906-2.3 203 03
C 4X-08280
906-2.3 Chain Tightener S60MC-C
Adjustment
4. 4. Tighten nut C hard against the contact face

of the shaft.
Tighten nut D.
Lock nuts C and D with the tab washer.
5. Tighten nut A.
Lock nuts A and B with the tab washer.

GN906-2.3 203 04
5.
GN906-2.3 203 05
C 4X-08280
S60MC-C Camshaft 106-3
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
04
106-3 Camshaft
X Stopped engine Risk of severe personal injury

X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Pin gauge for TDC of

crankthrow No. 1
Check measurement 663 mm
D-2 Pin gauge for camshaft

Check measurement 255 mm
D-3 Max. permissible change in

lead angle 2°
corresponding to 3.5 mm
D-2
D-1
C 4X-08280
106-3 Camshaft S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-08280
S60-70MC-C Camshaft 906-3.1
Checking
Camshaft
S60-70MC-C
205
Checking
906-3.1
1.
1. Turn the crankthrow for cylinder 1 to TDC.
Turn in the AHEAD direction to ensure that

the tension of the chain on the chain drive
is correct. If necessary, adjust the chain
tension.
HM906-7.0 56 01
Check the TDC of cylinder 1 against the

mark on the turning wheel.
2. Check the TDC position with the pin gauge 2.

on the crankthrow, D-1.
GN906-3.1 203 02
C 4X-08280
906-3.1 Camshaft S60-70MC-C
Checking
3. 3. Position the camshaft pin gauge in the cen-

tre punch mark, and measure the deviation,
if any, in lead angle.
For max. permissible change, see D-3.
4. Check and adjust the cylinder lubricator.

D-2 See Procedure 903-2.1.
Check the setting of the starting air distrib-

utor.
5. When checking the camshaft position, also

check the running surface of the cams.
GN906-3.1 203 03 L0b
As the inspection must include the entire

D-3 surface of the cam, the cam should be
turned the whole way round during the in-
spection.
5. The running surface of the cam must be
completely smooth and bright.
6. If light scratches are ascertained, remove

them by carefully polishing the cam in the
direction of rotation with a fine carborun-
dum stone. Such light scratches can ap-
pear if the roller guide and the cam are not
correctly aligned.
GN906-3.1 203 05
In the event of heavier scratches or direct

flaking of the material on the running path,
6. CO., LTD. should be contacted for further
instructions.
GN906-3.1 203 06
C 4X-08280
S60-70MC-C Camshaft 906-3.3
Adjustment
Adjustment
906-3.3
1. If the chains prove to be so heavily worn 1.

that the deviation between the measuring
points and the pin gauge has reached the
maximum value stated in Procedure 906-
3.1, MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIPBUILD-
ING CO., LTD. should be contacted for fur-
ther instructions.
GN906-3.3 203 01 L0b
C 4X-08280
S60MC-C Camshaft Bearings 106-4
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
04
106-4 Camshaft Bearings
Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Weight of bearing cap 16.7 kg
D-2 Screws for bearing cap

D-3 Clearance between cap/

bearing housing 3±0.3 mm
D-4 Max. wear on bearing shell 0.10 mm
C 4X-08280
106-4 Camshaft Bearings S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-08280
S60-70MC-C Camshaft Bearing 906-4.1
Checking
Camshaft Bearing
S60-70MC-C
205
Checking
906-4.1
1.
1. Dismount the inspection covers from the
front of the camshaft housing.
Check for wiped-out metal at the bearing

ends, and for fragments of metal in the
camshaft housing. In the event of any signs
of anomalies, the bearing shell must be
dismantled for closer investigation and, if
necessary, the bearing shell must be re-
placed.
If no anomalies are found during the visual

inspection, dismantling need only be car-
ried out in connection with Class surveys.
GN906-4.1 205 01
C 4X-08280
906-4.2 Camshaft Bearing S60-70MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
906-4.2
1.
Warning!
Before dismantling any camshaft bear-

ings, the main chain must be relieved of
tension by loosening the chain tightener
to avoid damaging engine parts.
1. Remove the inspection cover from the cam-

shaft housing.
HN906-4.2 205 01
Dismount the lubricating oil connecting pipe

and the plug screws from the baseplate
over the bearing in question.
2. Lift the roller guide of the exhaust valve hy-

draulic pump. See Procedure 908-7.
2. Loosen the bearing cap screws through the

holes in the baseplate.
Remove the screws from the bearing cap.
Mount two 10 mm eye bolts in the pertain-

ing threads on top of the bearing cap.
3. Slide the bearing cap carefully towards the

exhaust cam disc.
GN906-4.2 203 02
Turn the bearing cap and pull it out through

the inspection opening.
3.
D-1
GN906-4.2 203 03
C 4X-08280
Dismantling
4. Place the hydraulic jack in the camshaft 4.

housing underneath the circular part of the
exhaust cam.
Place a dial gauge on the camshaft, and lift

the camshaft 0.30 mm.
5. Press lightly on the upper edge of the shell

to turn the shell up over the camshaft.
Remove the shell from the camshaft hous-

ing.
GN906-4.2 203 04
GN906-4.2 203 05 5.
C 4X-08280
Overhaul
Overhaul
906-4.3
1. 1. For assessment of the bearing condition,

see Vol. 1 “Operation & Data”, Chapter 708
‘Bearings’.
Inspect the entire surface of the bearing

journal for seizures.
If seizures are found on the bearing journal

surface (on account of bearing breakdown),
polish the surface with a fine carborundum
stone to re-establish a bright and smooth
surface.
By closely examining the sliding surface of

the bearing shells visually, an impression
can be formed of whether the lubrication of
the bearing surface has been insufficient or
GN906-4.3 203 01
entirely missing. Normally, camshaft bear-

ing damage only occurs due to faulty lubri-
D-4 cation.
Measure the thickness of the bearing shell

with a micrometer to check the amount of
wear.
C 4X-08280
Mounting
Mounting
906-4.4
1. Clean the bearing journal, the bearing sup- 2.

port and the bearing shell.
2. Coat the bearing shell with oil, mount the

shell on the camshaft, and turn it into place.
3. Place the bearing cap on the camshaft next

to the exhaust cam.
Note!
Be careful not to scratch the exhaust cam
GN906-4.4 203 02
roller surface.
Turn the bearing cap to an upright position

and slide it carefully onto the bearing shell.
3.
Remove the eye bolts and mount the out-
ermost bearing cap screw.
4. Tighten the outermost screw lightly until the

clearance given in D-3 is reached. Then
mount and tighten the innermost screw with
a torque spanner. See Data D-2. This pro-
cedure ensures that the outermost screw
will obtain the correct torque.
Check the torque on the outermost screw

with a torque spanner.
GN906-4.4 203 03
4.
GN906-4.4 203 04
C 4X-08280
Mounting
5. 5. Check the clearance D-3. Then mount the

lubricating oil pipe and the plug screw in the
baseplate.
6. Lower the camshaft into position. Remove

the hydraulic jack from the camshaft hous-
ing.
7. Clean the camshaft housing and mount the

inspection covers.
HN906-4.4 205 05
6.
HN906-4.4 205 06
7.
HN906-4.4 205 07
C 4X-08280
S60MC-C Moment Compensator (Where Used) 106-5
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
05
106-5 Moment Compensator (Where Used)

X Shut off fuel oil
Data
4X-08280
106-5 Moment Compensator (Where Used) S60MC-C
Data
4X-08280
S60MC-C Moment Compensator (Where Used) 906-5.1
Checking
Moment Compensator (Where Used)
S60MC-C
206
Checking
906-5.1
1. For 4-cylinder engines

If dismantling has been necessary, the
flyweights must be assembled in the correct viewed from AFT
position in relation to the engine crankshaft.
Incorrectly mounted flyweights can cause
(heavy) vibrations of the engine.
Note!
The following applies to a clockwise-

rotating engine.
Aftmost 2nd Order Moment Compensator
651206M01
Turn the crankthrow of cylinder No. 1 in the Cylinder No.1
AHEAD direction to the position shown in the
figures for 4, 5, 6-cylinder engines, respect-
ively. 2. For 5-cylinder engines
Check that the flyweights point vertically viewed from AFT
downwards (max. deviation one-half chain-
wheel tooth pitch).
Turn the camshaft relative to the crankshaft in

accordance with the “valve opening diagram”,
and then mount the chain.
Tighten the chain in accordance with the
instruction.
Turn the crankthrow of cylinder No. 1 in the

ahead direction to TDC and carry out fine
adjustment of the camshaft.
651206M02
Cylinder No.1
3. For 6-cylinder engines
viewed from AFT

651206M03
Cylinder No.1
4X-08280
S60MC-C Chain Tightener 1” 106-7
Data

Special Data
S60MC-C
01
106-7 Chain Tightener 1”
X Stopped engine
Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Slackness in 1” chain 25-50 mm
C 4X-08280
106-7 Chain Tightener 1” S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-08280
S60MC-C Chain Tightener 1” 906-7.1
Checking
Chain Tightener 1”
S60MC-C
201
Checking
906-7.1
1.
1. Turn the engine so that the slack of the
chain occurs on the free length.
Measure the slack of the chain manually by

moving the chain to the outer positions of
the slack and finding the difference be-
tween these positions. D-1
If the chain tension does not correspond to
the measurements stated on the data
sheet, adjustment is to be carried out.
HN906-7.1 201 01
C 4X-08280
906-7.3 Chain Tightener 1” S60MC-C
Adjustment
Adjustment
906-7.3
1. 1. Loosen the screws of the chain tightener,

and by turning the “loose” plate of the chain
tightener, adjust the tension of the chain in
such a way that it is in accordance with the
limits stated in Data.
Again tighten up the screw and check the

slack.
If the chain tension is in order, lock the

screw with locking wire.
HN906-7.3 201 02
C 4X-08280
S60MC-C Chain Drive and Camshaft Panel Plate 90651-133M
C 4X-08280
Plate 90651-133M Chain Drive and Camshaft Panel S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.

044 Chain assembling tool 06B52
056 Chain disassembling tool 06B51
068 Pin spanner 06A85
070 Hydraulic jack for lift of camshaft 06A06
081 Lifting attachment 06A13
093 Chain assembling tool 06B54
103 Chain disassembling tool 06B53
019- Tool panel,complete -

103 with tools *)
*) Optional extras
C 4X-08280
S60MC-C Camshaft - Tools Plate 90661-51M
C 4X-08280
Plate 90661-51M Camshaft - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
025 Pin gauge for camshaft 06B73

050 Pin gauge for crankshaft 06B72
C 4X-08280
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
S60-70MC-C Starting Air Distributor 107-1
Data
Special Data
S60-70MC-C
03
107-1 Starting Air Distributor

Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Slide valve

- tightening torque 18-20 Nm
C 4X-04928
107-1 Starting Air Distributor S60-70MC-C
Data
C 4X-04928
S60-70MC-C Starting Air Distributor 907-1.1
Checking
Starting Air Distributor
S60-70MC-C
205
Checking
907-1.1
2.
1. Turn the engine to bring the piston of cylin-
der No. 1 to TDC. Check the position with
the pin gauge.
2. Remove the small end cover of the distrib-

utor housing.
3. Check that the TDC marking scratch on the

starting cam is positioned vertically at the
slide valve of cylinder No. 1.
4. If necessary adjust the position of the start-
HN907-1.1 205 02
ing cam by loosening the centre screw and
turning the starting cam until the TDC mark-
ing scratch is positioned vertically at the
slide valve of cylinder No. 1. Then tighten
the centre screw.
HN907-1.1 205 03 3.
4.
HN907-1.1 205 04
C 4X-04928
907-1.3 Starting Air Distributor S60-70MC-C
Overhaul
Overhaul
907-1.3
2. Difficulties in starting can be caused by the

starting air distributor slide valves “sticking”
(see Vol. 1, Chapter 703), so that these are not
activated and pressed against the cam during
the starting procedure.
This can be caused by too high humidity in the

main starting air system, which can result in the
formation of rust, and also by dirt, preventing
the slide valves from functioning.
HN907-1.3 205 02
In both cases it is necessary to clean the slide

valves and the liners in the distributor housing
to remove dirt, rust and foreign particles.
3.
Experience will show how often this is neces-
sary to prevent starting difficulties, as differenc-
es will be found from plant to plant.
1. Blank off the main starting air and the con-

trol air. If this is not possible, lock the main
starting valve in the close position with a
stopper.
2. Remove all the pipes from the end of the

distributor.
Loosen and remove the screws from the

small and large end covers. Dismount the
end cover which gives access to the slide
valves.
HN907-1.3 205 03
3. Turn the camshaft until the slot in the start-

ing cam is opposite the pin of the slide
valve.
4. 4. Remove the screws and the cap from the

particular slide valve in question.
Remove the guide screw for the slide valve.

HN907-1.3 205 04
C 4X-04928
Overhaul
5. Remove the complete slide valve (with 5.

spring and the upper liner) from the distrib-
utor housing by means of a brass mandrel.
6. Press-in the spring and remove the two part

locking ring.
7. Remove the upper spring guide, the spring,

the lower spring guide and the upper liner
from the slide valve.
HN907-1.3 205 05
MC907-2.2 29 06 6.
7.
MC907-2.2 29 07
C 4X-04928
907-1.3 Starting Air Distributor S60-70MC-C
Overhaul
9. 8. Clean all the sliding surfaces on the slide

valve. Lubricate all parts with Molybdenum
Disulphide (MoS2).
Clean the liners and the distributor housing.

Test that the slide valve moves easily in the
liners.
Note!
Polishing with emery cloth or steel wool

must not take place as this will cause
MC907-2.2 29 09
scratching marks on the sliding surfaces

of the piston slide valve or distributor
housing.
10. 9. Place the upper liner, the lower spring

guide, the spring and the upper spring
guide over the slide valve.
10. Press-in the spring and mount the two-part

locking ring.
11. Mount the complete slide valve in the dis-

tributor housing by means of a brass man-
drel. (Check that the slot of the starting cam
is opposite the pin of the slide valve, when
mounting).
Lubricate the groove in the starting cam

MC907-2.2 29 10
with Molybdenum Disulphide (MoS 2).
11.
HN907-1.3 205 11
C 4X-04928
Overhaul
12. Mount the guide screw for the slide valve. 12.
Mount the cap and the screws on top of the
D-1
slide valve.
(Tightening torque of screw, see Data D-1)
13. Finally, mount the two end covers and con-

nect the main starting air and the control
air.
HN907-1.3 205 04 L0a

HN907-1.3 205 02 13.
C 4X-04928
S60MC-C Starting Air Valve 107-2
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
05
107-2 Starting Air Valve
X Stopped engine May cause spring under tension
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil 40-280 Nm
Data
D-1 Weight of starting air valve 36 kg
D-2 Starting valve nuts

- tightening torque
D-2.1 (first step) 70 Nm
D-2.2 (final) 210 Nm
When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet 107-2 Edition 05Ma Page 1 (2)
4X-04928
107-2 Starting Air Valve S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet 107-2 Edition 05Ma
4X-04928
S60MC-C Starting Air Valve 907-2.1
Checking
Starting Air Valve
S60MC-C
204
Checking
907-2.1
1.
1. When the starting air valve has been
overhauled, see Procedure 907-2.3,
connect a supply of working air to the
control air inlet at the top of the valve.
Check that the valve opens approx. 15-20

mm.
2. Close off the air supply
Check that the valve closes fully.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 a couple of times.
721204M01
2.
721204M02
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 907-2.1 Edition 204Ma Page 1 (6)
4X-04928
907-2.2 Starting Air Valve S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
907-2.2
1. 1. Shut off the starting air and control air inlet.
Dismount the control air pipes
Mount two eye bolts in the top cover of the

valve.
Hook a lifting wire on to the eye bolts.
Unscrew the fixing nuts of the starting valve

flange.
2. Lift away the starting valve.

722204M01
2.
D-1
722204M02
Page 2 (6) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 907-2.2 Edition 204Ma
4X-04928
Overhaul
Overhaul
907-2.3
1. Place the starting air valve horizontally in a 1.

bench vice provided with “soft” jaws.
Remove and discard the O-ring from the

valve housing.
2. Loosen and remove the screws from the

top cover.
Dismount the top cover.

D-1
3. Use the face wrench for the spindle as a
back-stop when loosening the two screws
which tighten the piston to the spindle.
723204M01
Remove the screws.
When unscrewing, the piston will partially

be pressed out of the valve housing due to 2.
the spring force.
723204M02
3.
723204M03
4X-04928
Overhaul
4. 4. Remove the piston from the top end of the

valve housing.
Take out the spindle from the bottom end of

the valve housing.
Remove the spring from the top end of the

housing.
5. Apply grinding paste, e.g. carborundum No.

200. Grind the valve housing seating with
the grinding ring.
6. When lapping the seatings of the spindle

and valve housing to match, use the face
wrench to rotate the spindle.
As grinding paste, use e.g. carborundum

No. 500.
723204M04
5.
723204M05
6.
723204M06
4X-04928
Overhaul
7. Thoroughly clean the valve housing and all 7.

the parts in diesel oil or kerosene.
Lubricate all internal parts and sliding

surfaces with, e.g., Molybdenum
Disulphide, MoS2.
Insert the spindle in the valve housing.

Then mount the spring in the housing
around the spindle and, finally, place the
piston on top of the spindle.
8. Fit the two screws.
When tightening the screws, the piston will

compress the spring.
Tighten the screws continuously until the

piston faces tightly against the spindle. Use
the face wrench as a back-stop.
9. Mount and tighten the top cover.

723204M07
Fit a new O-ring on the valve housing.
10. Check the starting air valve.

9.
If the valve is not to be mounted in the
engine immediately, cover all openings with
plastic to prevent dirt from entering the
valve during storage.
723204M09
4X-04928
Mounting
Mounting
907-2.4
1. 1. Carefully clean the starting valve bore in

the cylinder cover and, if necessary,
recondition the seat for the starting valve in
the bore, see Procedure 901-1.2.
Fit a new O-ring on the overhauled valve

and lubricate with Neverseize or
Molybdenum Disulphide, MoS2.
For overhaul, see Procedure 907-2.2.
2. Mount the valve in the cylinder cover.
3. Mount and tighten-up the nuts as follows to

get the uniform mating pressure distribution
between housing and cylinder cover.
724204M01
step 1:Tighten the nut “A” by D-2.1 of

torque.
2.
step 2:Tighten the nut “B” by D-2.2 of
torque.
D-1
step 3:Tighten the nut “A” by D-2.2 of
torque.
Mount the control air pipe and turn on

starting air and control air.
724204M02
3.
D-2
Nut “A”
Nut “B”
724204M03
4X-04928
S60MC-C Starting Valve - Tools Plate 90761-00M
C 4X-04928
Plate 90761-00M Starting Valve - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
M1 Lifting tool 07A11

M2 Dismantling stand for starting valve *) (07A51)
M3 Performance tester for starting valve *) (07A80)
M4 Spanner 07A85
*) Optional extras
C 4X-04928
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C High-Pressure Pipe 108-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
05
108-1 High-Pressure Pipe
X Stopped engine Do not enter area when over

head lifting is being carried out
Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Weight of high-pressure pipe 37 kg
D-2 Distance from end of high-

pressure pipe to lower edge
of pressure flange 16 mm
D-3 High-pressure pipe

C 4X-36072
108-1 High-Pressure Pipe S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C High-Pressure Pipe 908-1.2
Dismantling
High-Pressure Pipe
S60MC-C
205
Dismantling
908-1.2
1.
1. When replacing the hydraulic high-pressure
pipe, the exhaust valve or the hydraulic ac-
tuator, check and, if necessary, recondition
the high-pressure pipe seal surfaces.
2. Before dismantling the high-pressure pipe,

stop the camshaft oil pump.
Loosen the screws for the high-pressure

pipe and lift the pipe slightly away from the
actuator to let the oil in the pipe drain
through the drain holes in the actuator. D-1
GN908-1.2 205 01
2.
GN908-1.2 205 02
C 4X-36072
908-1.3 High-Pressure Pipe S60MC-C
Overhaul
Overhaul
908-1.3
1. 1. Check the contact surfaces of the pressure

pipe for marks and, if necessary, grind the
pipe ends by means of the grinding mandrel
and the two guiding tools.
Start grinding with a coarse grinding paste,

for example Carborundum No. 200, and fin-
ish with a fine grinding paste, for example
GN908-1.3 205 01
Carborundum No. 500.
2. After reconditioning the contact surfaces of

the pipe, measure the distance from the
edge of the thrust bushing to the contact
2. surface at both ends of the pipe. This mea-
surement is to correspond with the value
stated in Data.
Check the disc in the exhaust valve and the

actuator for marks on the seal surface.
GN908-1.3 205 02 L0a
Replace the O-rings on the disc.
D-2 If considered necessary, replace the disc.
Lift the disc free by, for example, using a

screwdriver in the groove of the disc.
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C High-Pressure Pipe 908-1.4
Mounting
Mounting
908-1.4
1. Mount the hydraulic high-pressure pipe as 1.

follows:
Place the high-pressure pipe with the

sealing surfaces of the pipe resting on the
disc of the exhaust valve/actuator. Take
care not to damage the O-rings on the disc.
After fitting the pipe correctly relative to the

exhaust valve and actuator, tighten up the
GN908-1.4 205 01
screws of the pressure flanges diagonally,
see Data.
D-3
2. Check the system for tightness.
2.
GN908-1.4 205 02
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve 108-2
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
05
108-2 Exhaust Valve
X Block the starting mechanism Do not enter area when over

Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Exhaust valve, complete 710 kg

D-2 Exhaust valve housing 378 kg
D-3 Oil cylinder 96 kg
D-4 Air cylinder 30 kg
D-5 Spindle 73 kg
D-6 Bottom piece 98 kg
D-7 Oil cylinder
- inside diameter max. 85.4 mm
D-8 Piston rings, min. thickness 3.2 mm
D-9 Min. distance to piston 47.0 mm
D-10 Max. distance to piston 51.2 mm
D-11 Min. diameter of spindle stem 71.8 mm
D-12 Oil cylinder
D-13 Screws for lifting bolt
D-14 Safety valve
- tightening torque 50-80 Nm
D-15 Opening pressure,
safety valve
See Vol. 1 “OPERATION”
D-16 Grinding angle, valve spindle 30.5 °
D-17 Grinding angle, bottom piece 30 °
D-18 Max. grinding of seat 2.3 mm
D-19 Gap of bottom piece 1.0 mm
D-20 Max. burn-off of spindle 9 mm
D-21 Max. grinding of spindle 2.0 mm
D-22 Hydraulic pressure 150-165 MPa
- dismantling (1500-1650 bar)
D-23 Hydraulic pressure 150 MPa
- mounting (1500 bar)
D-24 Max. diameter, top 72.6 mm
D-25 Max. diameter, bottom 74.5 mm
When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet 108-2 Edition 05Me Page 1 (2)
MITSUI EMGINEERING & SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD.
C 4X-36072
108-2 Exhaust Valve S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data Sheet 108-2 Edition 05Me
MITSUI ENGINEERING &SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD.
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve 908-2.1
Checking
Exhaust Valve
S60MC-C
206
Checking
908-2.1
1.
1. Before mounting an overhauled exhaust
valve in the engine, it is recommended to
check the valve as follows:
• Lift up the valve with the engine room D-1

crane (which makes the valve open).
• Connect compressed air to the pneu-

matic piston. The valve should now
close.
• Check that a 1.0 mm feeler gauge can be

inserted about 15 mm into gap G3, to
ensure that there is a clearance between
the outer parts of the seating faces of
bottom piece and the spindle.
G3
• After shutting-off the compressed air
supply and releasing the vent plug screw
located just above the ball cock on the air
HN908-2.1 206 01L0b
cylinder, the exhaust valve should open.
• After doing this a couple of times, leave

the valve closed and shut-off the com-
pressed air. The valve should remain
closed for at least 10 to 15 minutes.
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 908-2.1 Edition 206Mk Page 1 (19)
4X-36072
908-2.2 Exhaust Valve S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
908-2.2
1. 1. Close the cooling water inlet and outlet, and

drain the exhaust valve.
Dismount the high-pressure pipe for the hy-

draulic valve actuation.
Disconnect the cooling water outlet pipe

from the exhaust valve.
Dismount the return oil pipe from the

exhaust valve.
HN908-2.2 206 01
2. Dismount the air pipes for the pneumatic

exhaust valve
Remove the screws of the cooling water in-

let flange at the side of the exhaust valve.
2.
3. Remove the plate cover with insulation from
the intermediate pipe and remove the
screws which attach the intermediate pipe
to the inlet pipe of the exhaust receiver.
Note!
The four lowermost screws need only be

loosened, not removed.
GN908-2.2 203 02L0b
3.
HN908-2.2 206 03
Page 2 (19) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 908-2.2 Edition 206Mk
4X-36072
Dismantling
4.
4. Remove the protective caps from the ex- D-22
haust valve studs, and mount the four hy-
draulic jacks.

four high-pressure hoses.

pressure as stated in Data. Then loosen
and remove the nuts.
HN908-2.2 206 04
5. Mount the eye screw in the lifting tool on
top of the exhaust valve.
Attach the crane to the lifting tool fitted on

top of the valve and lift away the exhaust
valve. 5.
Carefully clean the exhaust valve bore in

the cylinder cover and recondition the seat-
ing and sealing surfaces of the bore, if re-
quired.
For overhaul of the exhaust valve, see Pro-

D-1
cedure 908-2.3.
HN908-2.4 206 01L0c
4X-36072
Overhaul
Overhaul
908-2.3
1.
Note!
If the “diamantling tool for exhaust valve”

is purchased as the option, the exhaust
valve is to be overhauled after fitting on
08A55
the “dismantling tool” instead of men-
tioned below procedure.
See maker’s instruction.
1. Set the stand in the hole for the support of

piston on the platform.
GN908-2.3 203 01L0a
2. Place the exhaust valve on the stand on the

platform.
Remove the eight nuts and the safety

2. strap from the oil cylinder.
3. Lift away and place the oil cylinder on a

wooden support.
Dismount and inspect the O-rings and the

disc of the hydraulic high-pressure pipe for
D-3 marks.
Replace the O-rings and disc, if necessary.
Check the functioning of the exhaust valve

rotation indicator.
HM908-2.3 206 01L0c
3.
MA908-2.0 103 02
4X-36072
Overhaul
4. Loosen the screws and remove the lifting 4.

eye screw from the oil cylinder to gain ac-
cess to the orifice plug.
Unscrew and clean the orifice plug.
Check and clean the bore for the orifice

plug in the top of the oil cylinder.
5. Place the oil cylinder in a horizontal posi-

tion.
Remove and discard the seal ring.
KG908-2.0 115 03
Remove the flange and take out the piston.
Inspect the bore of the oil cylinder for scor-

ing and check its measurements.
5.
If the diameter of the bore exceeds the val-
D-7
ue stated in Data, send the oil cylinder to
CO., LTD.
6. Release the vent plug screw on the air cyl-

KG908-2.0 115 04
inder to let the air escape from below the

piston.
Remove the four screws from the flange on

top of the air piston and dismount the
flange. 6.
Loosen the air piston from the conical lock-

ing ring by means of a tin hammer, and re-
move the conical locking ring.
GM908-2.0 96 05L0a
4X-36072
Overhaul
7. 7. Mount the lifting tool on top of the valve

housing and lift the valve housing clear of
the valve spindle.
8. Unscrew and remove the lock screws which

D-5 retain the bottom piece. Lift the valve hous-
ing approx. 10 mm.
D-2 If the bottom piece has become stuck, use
a tin hammer to release it. Lift the valve
housing away and land it on a couple of
wooden planks.
Remove the O-rings from the bottom piece

and clean all the cooling bores.
GN908-2.3 203 06L0c
8.
08A17
GN908-2.3 203 07L0c
D-6
4X-36072
Overhaul
Bottom piece: 9.
9. Inspect the seating of the bottom piece

carefully for damage and check with the
template.
Note!
Before using the template, thoroughly

clean the contact faces on the valve
housing seat with a steel brush.
All measurements should be taken at

four diametrically opposite points on the
circumference of the bottom piece seat-
ing
Take measurements G 2 and G3, using a

feeler gauge. Compare the results with the
figures stated in Data D-18 and D-19.
D-17
MB908-2.3 230 12
10. If burn marks are visible on the bottom

piece seating OR G 3 does not equal D-19,
THEN the valve housing seat must be
ground.
If the template rests on the lower surface in

the groove, i.e. G2 = 0, THEN the bottom
piece seating must not be ground, regard-
less of burn marks or G3.
Contact MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIP-

BUILDING CO., LTD. Diesel for advice on
reconditioning.
4X-36072
Overhaul
11. 11. If it is necessary to grind the seating, pro-

ceed as follows:
D-17 Before placing the bottom piece on the

grinding machine, away the grinding head
from the grinding table.
Mount two eye bolts in the bottom piece

and place the bottom piece on the circular
table of the grinding machine. Make sure,
by means of a dial indicator, that the bottom
piece is correctly centered.
MB908-2.3 230 11
Adjust the grinding head to achieve the cor-

rect grinding angle as stated in Data.
Note!
12.
As the grinding angle is very important
G3 for the correct operation of the exhaust
valve, make absolutely sure that the
grinding head is correctly adjusted.
Regarding the use of the grinding machine,

see separate instructions.
12. During the grinding, use the bottom piece

template frequently to ensure that maxi-
mum grinding is not exceeded.
D-17
After grinding, inspect the bottom piece
seating again, using a feeler gauge and the
bottom piece template, to measure how
much material has been ground away.
MB908-2.3 230 12
G2 Grind the recess so that gap G3 equals D-

19 as stated on the Data sheet.
13. 13. If the grinding tool for the outside seating is

available, grind the outside seating using
carborundum No. 200 and the special
grinding tool (ring), rotating it by hand (do
not use the power of the grinding machine
to rotate the bottom piece).
Grind until a smooth surface is achieved.
Clean the seat of grinding paste.

MB908-2.3 233 13
4X-36072
Overhaul
Valve spindle 14.
14. Inspect the seating of the valve spindle for

burn marks.
Check the burn-off F-1 of the valve spindle

by measuring at each of the points A, B, C,
D and E, indicated by means of notches in
the template.
Note! F-1
Before using the template, clean the con-
tact faces on the valve spindle thoroughly
HC908-2.0 117 11
with a steel brush.
All measurement should be taken at four A B C
D E
diametrically opposite points on the cir-
cumference of the valve spindle.
15.
15. Measure gap G1 between the template and
the seating of the spindle.
G1
If burn marks are visible on the seating of
the spindle, the valve must be ground.
If gap G 1 exceeds the max. value D-21, see

Data, OR the burn-off F1 exceeds the max.
burn-off D-20, the spindle must not be
ground.
HC908-2.0 117 12
Contact MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIP- D-16

BUILDING CO., LTD. for advice on recon-
ditioning.
16.
16. Check the spindle stem for wear in the area
280
between 280 mm and 410mm measured

410
from the top of the spindle.
If the stem diameter is less than stated in

Data, or the hard facing layer is worn away,
D-11
BUILDING CO., LTD. for advice.
JM908-2.0 92 12
4X-36072
Overhaul
17. 17. To grind the seating of the spindle, place

the spindle in the grinding machine.
Check the alignment with a dial gauge.
Adjust the grinding head to achieve the cor-

rect grinding angle as stated in Data.
D-16 Note!
As the grinding angle is very important

for the correct operation of the exhaust
valve, make absolutely sure that the
grinding head is correctly adjusted.
GM908-2.0 119 14
Regarding the use of the grinding machine,

see separate instructions.
During grinding, measure the gap G 1 fre-

quently. The max. grinding of the spindle,
see Data, must not be exceeded.
If the max. grinding is reached and burn

marks are still visible on the seating of the
spindle, contact MITSUI ENGINEERING &
SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD. for advice on re-
conditioning.
4X-36072
Overhaul
18. Dismount the air piston from the air cylin- 18.
der, and check the teflon guide ring and te-
flon seal ring for wear.
Mount two eye screws in the air cylinder

and dismount the air cylinder.
D-4
Note!
Don’t dismount the air cylinder with air

piston installed because there is a possi-
bility that the air piston can not be dis-
mounted from air cylinder.
19. Clean the air cylinder and check the run-
GN908-2.3 203 16 L0a

ning surface for wear or possible scores.
Remove and discard the O-rings and the in-

side seal ring.
20. Remove the protective cap from the safety 19.

valve, dismount the valve from the air cyl-
inder, and replace the gasket and seal ring.
GN908-2.3 236 24
20.
NA908-2.3 209 22
D-14
4X-36072
Overhaul
21. 21. Place the valve in the pressure testing de-

vice.
Connect the testing device with the high-

pressure pump by means of a hose.
Check the opening pressure, see Data.
If the opening pressure is not correct, loos-

D-15 en the lock nut and, using a screwdriver,
adjust the safety valve until the correct
pressure is indicated.
GN908-2.3 203 19
Tighten the lock nut and test the opening

pressure once more.
When mounting the safety valve in the air

cylinder, use only the machined faces on
22. the valve housing and tighten, see Data.
Finally, mount the protective cap.
22. Inspect the bushing in the spindle guide for

wear and measure the top and bottom di-
D-24 ameters. See Data.
If it proves necessary to replace the bush-

ing, knock out the bushing with a hammer
D-25 and a suitable mandrel.
23. Mount the O-rings and seal ring on the

NA908-2.3 248 26L0a
bushing.
Note!
23. Make sure to mount the seal ring cor-

rectly, see the sketch.
NA908-2.3 248 28L0a
4X-36072
Overhaul
24. Mount the bottom piece (with new O-rings) 24.

on the valve housing and secure with the D-2
screws.
25. After overhauling and remounting bottom

piece, the valve spindle to be reassembled
with the valve housing in the stand, and
guide the air cylinder with the seal air ar-
rangement down over the valve spindle.
Caution!
GN908-2.3 203 21L0a

To avoid damage, take great care when
the internal rings (well-coated with ordi- D-6
nary lube oil) pass the groove for the
conical locking ring.
25.
D-4
GN908-2.3 203 22L0a
4X-36072
Overhaul
26. 26. If it is necessary to replace the rings, cut

them and remove them.
Be careful not to damage the edges of

the ring grooves in the piston.
Mount the new O-ring in the groove of the

air piston.
Caution!
Before mounting, heat the new teflon

GN908-2.3 203 24
rings in 100°C hot water for at least five

minutes.
When mounting the teflon rings, be care-

ful not to damage the running surfaces.
27.
After mounting, compress the teflon rings

by means of the conical ring. This is done
by pressing the air piston through the con-
ical ring.
GN908-2.3 203 25L0b
27. Fill the groove on top of the flange and the

lower part of the air cylinder with clean lu-
Clean oil bricating oil (approx.0.5 litre).
28. Fit the conical guide ring for the air piston
28. on the air cylinder.
Lower the air piston over the valve spindle

down into the air cylinder.
Caution!
To avoid damage, take great care when

the internal seal ring in the air piston
passes the groove for the conical locking
ring.
Remove the conical guide ring from the air

cylinder.
GN908-2.3 203 26
4X-36072
Overhaul
29. Mount the conical locking ring and lift the 29.
air piston up around the locking ring.
Remove the eye screws.
Mount the flange on top of the air piston

and, by means of the four screws, tighten
the air piston and the flange together.
30. Remove the piston rings from the oil piston

and check them for wear.
If the thickness of the rings has worn down
GN908-2.3 203 27L0a

to the minimum, see Data, discard the rings
and mount new ones.
Check that the TOP mark on the piston

rings faces upwards, when mounting.
30.
31. Mount the piston on top of the spindle and
check the functioning of the damper piston.
Connect compressed air supply to the

space below the air piston, so as to keep
the valve closed, and to keep the air cylin-
der in close contact with the valve housing.
Place the measuring tool on the air cylinder

across the piston.
GN908-2.3 203 28
D-8
31.
GN908-2.3 203 29L0a
4X-36072
Overhaul
32. 32. Check the mesh of the damper piston by

checking the distance from the upper edge
D-9 of the crossbar to the top of the damper pis-
D-10 ton. See Data.
If the measurement is outside the value

stated in Data, adjustment must take place
by changing the disc in the damper piston
as follows:
33. Place the piston in the special tool.
Press out the disc with the centre screw.

GN908-2.3 203 30L0a
If necessary, change also the spring and

the piston.
34. Assemble the damper piston with the new

33. disc in the special tool.
Place the piston upside down in the tool

and press the disc into place in the piston.
Check the mesh once more, repeating

points 31 and 32.
Disc
GN908-2.3 203 31 L0a
34.
GN908-2.3 203 32
4X-36072
Overhaul
35. After carefully cleaning and visually check- 35.

ing all the parts, assemble the parts and
mount the piston, orifice plug and lifting eye
in the oil cylinder. See Data. D-13
Mount a new seal ring in the inner groove
of the oil cylinder.
36. Mount the overhauled oil cylinder on top of

the air cylinder.
Mount the safety strap and tighten the nuts.

See Data.
GM908-2.0 96 25
Disconnect the compressed air.
37. Blow through the orifice pipe in the exhaust

valve housing with compressed air to re-
move any obstructions. 36.
D-3
D-12
HN908-2.3 206 34 L0c
37.
D-1
HN908-2.3 206 35L0c
4X-36072
Mounting
Mounting
908-2.4
1. 1. After fitting new O-rings on the seat and the

water connection, lift the overhauled ex-
haust valve.
Lubricate the O-rings and the threads of the

D-1 studs with molybdenum disulphide (MoS2).
Position the valve in the cylinder cover

bore, guiding it in accordance with the ex-
haust flanges and the water connection.
Note!
Before mounting the valve on the engine,

connect compressed air to the pneumatic
piston to keep the exhaust valve closed
during the mounting.
2. Mount the nuts and the hydraulic jacks.

Raise the pressure to the value indicated in
HN908-2.4 206 01 L0a
Data and tighten up the nuts.
Relieve the system of pressure, remove the

hydraulic jacks and the high-pressure hose,
and fit the protective caps.
2.
D-23
HN908-2.2 206 04
4X-36072
Mounting
3. Connect the intermediate pipe to the flange 3.

at the exhaust receiver.
Attach the insulation cover.
4. Mount the cooling water inlet and outlet

pipes on the exhaust valve.
Mount the high-pressure pipe, the return oil

pipe and the air pipe for the pneumatic
exhaust valve.
Open the lub. oil supply and the cooling wa-
HN908-2.4 206 03
ter supply to the exhaust valve.
Caution!
The air supply to the exhaust valve must 4.

always be connected before turning on
the oil supply to the exhaust valve
actuator.
This is very important, because other-

wise the valve will open more than in-
tended.
HN908-2.4 206 04L0c
4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve Actuator 108-3
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
04
108-3 Exhaust Valve Actuator

X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-2 Weight of hydraulic actuator 89 kg
D-3 Oil cylinder

- inside diameter max. 85.4 mm
D-4 Piston rings, min. thickness 3.2 mm
D-5 Hydraulic actuator

D-7 Locking plate

D-8 High-pressure pipe

C 4X-36072
108-3 Exhaust Valve Actuator S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve Actuator 908-3.1
Checking
Exhaust Valve Actuator
S60MC-C
205
Checking
908-3.1
1.
1. The non-return valve A is built into the oil
inlet pipe to the actuator.
To check the valve, disconnect and clean it

and connect a supply of working air (0.7
MPa (7 bar)) to the outlet side of the valve
(the side facing the actuator). If an air flow
is felt at the inlet side of the valve, it must
be overhauled.
Note!
GN908-3.1 203 01
The puncture valve B is not standard on
all engines, but for reversible 4-5 cyl.
engines.
During the starting sequence in ASTERN di-

rection, the exhaust valve will start to open
while the cylinder is still being supplied with
starting air.
The puncture valve B will delay opening of

the exhaust valve until the starting air se-
quence has finished.
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 908-3.1 Edition 205Mc Page 1 (4)
C 4X-36072
908-3.2 Exhaust Valve Actuator S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
908-3.2
1.
1. Stop the engine and shut off the oil supply.
Remove the inspection cover of the cam-

shaft housing to inspect the position of the
D-1 exhaust cam.
Turn the camshaft so that the roller rests on

the circular part of the cam.
B Dismount the inlet pipe and the drain pipe

GN908-3.2 205 01 L0a
Dismount the screws of the high-pressure

pipe flange, and lift away the high-pressure
pipe. See Data D-1. See Procedure 908-1.
2. Fit eye screws in the lifting holes of the

actuator housing and hook on a tackle.
2.
Unscrew the nuts on the two short studs,
D-2 then loosen the nuts on the long studs suc-
cessively until the tension of the roller guide
spring is relieved.
B Dismount the nuts and lift the housing care-

fully up, leaving the piston on the top of the
roller guide.
Remove the spring.
3. Remove the locking plate for the piston.

GN908-3.2 205 02 L0a
Turn the piston 90° to free it from the bay-

onet joint.
Remove the piston from the roller guide.
3.
B:Punctur valve
Use only for reversible 4-5 cyl. engines.
GN908-3.2 203 03 L0a
Page 2 (4) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 908-3.2 Edition 205Mc
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve Actuator 908-3.3
Overhaul
Overhaul
908-3.3
1. Clean the piston in kerosene and blow dry 1.

with compressed air. D-4
Take off the piston rings and check them for
wear. If the ring thickness has worn down
to the minimum (see Data D-4), discard the
rings and mount new ones.
Check that the TOP mark on the piston

rings faces upwards when mounting.
Inspect the sliding surfaces of the piston for

scratching or seizure marks.
2. Clean the oil cylinder and inspect the bores

for deposits.
Check the bore of the oil cylinder for possi-

ble scores and measure it for wear.
If the bore is seized or has worn down to

GN908-3.3 205 01
the measurement stated in Data D-3, send

the oil cylinder to MITSUI ENGINEERING &
SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD. for recondition-
ing.
2.
B
B:Punctur valve
D-3
GN908-3.3 203 02 L0a
C 4X-36072
908-3.4 Exhaust Valve Actuator S60MC-C
Mounting
Mounting
908-3.4
1.
1. Mount the actuator piston in the roller guide
and turn 90° to lock it in the bayonet joint.
Mount the locking plate and tighten as stat-

ed in Data D-6. Lubricate the piston with
plenty of camshaft lubricating oil.
2. Mount the spring on the roller guide. Care-

fully lower the actuator housing on to the
piston, taking care not to damage the piston
D-7 rings.
GN908-3.4 203 01 L0a
Mount the washers and the nuts on the two

long studs and tighten alternately until the
actuator housing rests firmly against the
roller guide housing.
Mount the washers and nuts on the two

2. short studs. Tighten all four nuts as stated
D-2 in Data D-5.
3. Mount the oil inlet pipe and the drain pipe

B
Mount the hydraulic high pressure pipe.
D-5
B:Punctur valve
GN908-3.4 205 02 L0a
3.
B
GN908-3.4 205 03 L0a
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve Roller Guide 108-4
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
05
108-4 Exhaust Valve Roller Guide

X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Weight of roller guide,

complete 45 kg
D-2 Max. clearance

roller/bushing/shaft pin 0.5 mm
D-3 Weight of oil cylinder,

complete 89 kg
C 4X-36072
108-4 Exhaust Valve Roller Guide S60MC-C
Data
MITSUI ENGINEEING & SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD.
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve Roller Guide 908-4.1
Checking
Exhaust Valve Roller Guide
S60MC-C
205
Checking
908-4.1
2.
1. The exhaust valve roller guide can be par-
tially checked while mounted on the engine,
using the following procedure:
Lift the roller guide.

2. Remove the camshaft inspection cover.
Turn the engine to provide the maximum

space between the roller guide and the cam
disc.
JN908-4.1 205 02
Check the movability of the roller by turning
this by hand to ascertain if the roller moves
freely and without unnecessary resistance
or “hard” points.
Also inspect the surface of the roller for 4.

possible damage marks, seizures or
scratches. Make sure that no traces of D-2
bearing metal exist in the roller guide hous-
ing.
Check the clearance in the slide bearing by

lifting the roller relative to the roller guide
and measuring the difference in distance
between the cam disc and the roller in the
upper and lower positions of the roller.
A more suitable and reliable method is to

check the roller guide and the bearing
clearance when the roller guide is dis-
mounted.
For dismantling of the roller guide, see Pro-
cedure 908-4.2.
3. Inspect the surfaces of the roller guide and

the roller for damage marks, seizures or
KC908-4.0 57 05
scratches.
4. To measure the clearance in the roller

guide slide bearing, place the roller guide
vertically upside down on a couple of
planks with the roller hanging freely.
Place a dial gauge against the roller. Then

lift the roller as much as the clearance per-
mits, which makes it possible to read the
clearance D-2 directly on the dial.
C 4X-36072
908-4.2 Exhaust Valve Roller Guide S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
908-4.2
1. 1. Dismantle the hydraulic actuator above the

exhaust valve roller guide.
2. Mount the roller guide lifting tool as follows:
D-3 • Lift the lock ring of the tool up on the

shaft of the tool.
• Place the tool in such a manner that its

B foot rests on the thrust piece in the bayo-
net joint of the roller guide.
• Turn the tool 90° so as to allow the foot

to engage properly in the bayonet joint.
• Lower the lock ring, thereby securing the

foot in the locked position.
Lift the roller guide out of the roller guide

housing, using the crane. Take care not to
damage the sliding surfaces of the roller
guide when lifting.
HG908-3.3 201 02
B:Punctur valve
2. Use only for reversible 4-5 cyl. engines.
D-1
HM908-4.0 51 02
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve Roller Guide 908-4.3
Overhaul
Overhaul
908-4.3
1. Inspect and check the exhaust valve roller 1.

guide.
2. It is recommended that the roller guide

should ONLY be overhauled/dismantled if
• irregularities when turning the roller,
• damage to the roller,
• larger clearance than stated on the Data

sheet,
• seizure marks on the slide surfaces,
Note!
For disassembling of the roller guide,

contact an MITSUI ENGINEERING &
SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD.
GM908-4.0 73 05
3. If no irregularities are found, just clean and

lubricate the roller guide before remounting
it in the roller guide bushing.
C 4X-36072
908-4.4 Exhaust Valve Roller Guide S60MC-C
Mounting
Mounting
908-4.4
1. 1. Mount the lifting tool for the roller guide as

follows:
• Lift the lock ring of the tool up on the

shaft of the tool.
• Place the tool in such a manner that its

foot rests on the thrust piece in the bayo-
net joint of the roller guide.

• Lower the lock ring, thereby securing the

foot in the locked position.
Lubricate the sliding surfaces of the roller

and the roller guide and lower it carefully
into the roller guide bushing.
Remove the lifting tool.
2. When mounting the roller guide, check the

HM908-4.0 51 02
clearance between the roller guide and the

guide plate mounted in the roller guide lin-
er.
2. Turn the camshaft so that the roller guide

is lifted approx. 20 mm. The clearance be-
tween the roller guide and the guide plate
should be the same at both ends.
3. Mount the actuator.

HM908-4.0 51 10
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve Cam 108-5
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
05
108-5 Exhaust Valve Cam

X Shut off fuel oil
Data
C 4X-36072
108-5 Exhaust Valve Cam S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve Cam 908-5.1
Checking
Exhaust Valve Cam
S60MC-C
206
Checking
908-5.1
To check the position of the exhaust cam, turn

the engine in AHEAD direction until the roller
guide (measured on the activator plunger) has
been lifted 12 mm.
If the cam has been correctly adjusted, the

crankthrow for the cylinder concerned will then
be in a position of A° past its TDC.
To check the lead angle, continue turning in

AHEAD direction until the roller guide has been
lifted 12 mm, corresponding to a turn of B° of
the crankshaft.
The lead angle is then
180° - A° + B°
2
The position of the cam must be correct within

a tolerance of ± 0.5°.
HM908-7.0 25 01a
The illustration shows the position of the ex-

haust cam for a 6-cyl. standard engine, with the
piston of the relevant cylinder in TDC. See the
adjustment sheet in Vol. 1, OPERATION,
Chapter 701, for the “lead angle” of the plant in
question.
The cam lead can be checked visually by read-

ing directly the scale position of the exhaust
cam over the marking scratch on the camshaft
and comparing this angle with the angle stated
in the adjustment sheet.
At the same time, it is recommended to check

the position of the camshaft with the pin gauge.
HM908-7.0 25 01b
C 4X-36072
Emergency Running - Data

Special Data
S60MC-C
04
108-7 Exhaust Valve
X Stopped engine
Shut off fuel oil
Data
C 4X-36072
Emergency Running - Data
C 4X-36072
Emergency Running
Exhaust Valve
S60MC-C
205
Emergency Running
908-7
3.
Warning!
Disengagement or re-engagement of the

fuel pump roller guide or the exhaust
valve roller guide must only take place at
engine standstill.
Engine trouble might require that a cylinder be

taken out of action. The engine can continue
operation with the fuel and exhaust systems of
a single cylinder disconnected. See Vol. 1, Sec-
JM908-5.0 55 02 L0a
tion 704.
This can take place with the exhaust valve lock-

er in either the open or the closed position. Ei-
ther way, carry out the following procedure:
4.
1. Stop the engine.
Stop the camshaft oil pump.
Lift the relevant fuel pump roller guide.

2. Dismantle the hydraulic high-pressure pipe.

3. Dismantle the connecting sleeve and the oil

inlet pipe. Discard the sealing rings. Blank
off the connection from the main oil pipe
JN908-4.1 205 02
with a plug screw.
4. Remove the inspection cover of the cam-

shaft housing. Turn the engine until the ex-
haust roller guide is at TDC. 5.
5. Position the lifting tool on the actuator and

screw the spindle into the top of the actua-
tor piston.
Tighten the lowermost nut on the tool to pull

up the roller guide as far as possible.
Tighten the upper nut of the tool against the

lower nut to secure the roller guide in this
position.
6. If the cylinder is to operate with the exhaust

JM908-5.0 55 03
valve closed, the air supply must remain

connected to the air cylinder of the exhaust
valve. No further action is required.
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 908-7 Edition 205M Page 1 (3)
C 4X-36072
Emergency Running
7. If the cylinder is to operate with the exhaust

valve open, continue the procedure as follows:
7. Turn off the air to the exhaust valve.
Remove the venting plug screw on the air

cylinder, to let the air inside the air cylinder
escape.
8. Dismantle the rotation indicator on the air

cylinder and mount the tool for opening of
the exhaust valve.
The tool will keep the piston of the air cyl-

inder in the bottom position and thus keep
the exhaust valve open.
GN908-7.0 203 07
8.
HM908-6.0 12 22
Page 2 (3) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 908-7 Edition 205M
C 4X-36072
Emergency Running
After overhaul of the cylinder unit, re-engage 9.

the exhaust valve gear as follows:
9. Loosen the nuts of the lifting tool to lower

the roller guide on to the exhaust cam. Re-
move the tool.
10. If the engine has been running with the ex-

haust valve open, remove the tool mounted
in the air cylinder and mount the rotation in-
dicator.
Note!
The rotation indicator should only be left

in the engaged position for short periods
of time during operation of the engine.
Leaving the rotation indicator in the

engaged position continuously might
damage the exhaust valve due to the for-
JM908-5.0 55 06
mation of a wear groove in the air piston

of the exhaust valve.
Re-connect the air supply to the air cylin-

der. 11.
11. Mount the oil inlet pipe and the connecting

sleeve on the actuator housing, after fitting
new sealing rings on the connecting sleeve.
12. Mount the hydraulic high-pressure pipe.

13. Engage the fuel pump roller guide.

HM908-7 201 11 L0a
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve Panel Plate 90851-133M
C 4X-36072
Plate 90851-133M Exhaust Valve Panel S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
041 Tightening gauge 08B71
053 Lifting tool for roller guide 08B11
065 Lifting tool for spindle 08A12
077 Cone ring 08A51
089 Gauge for valve spindle 08A75
090 Pressure testing device 08A71
100 Drift 08B55
112 Lifting tool for exhaust valve gear 08B12
124 Tool for opening of exhaust valve 08A60
136 Measuring tool 08A73
148 Tool for hydraulic piston 08A46
150 Gauge for valve seat 08A76
161 Grinding tool 08B24
*) Optional extras
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve - Tools Plate 90861-27Md
When referring to this page, please quote Plate 90861 Edition 27Md Page 3 (8)
C 4X-36072
Plate 90861-27Md Exhaust Valve - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
046 Grinding machine, complete 08A25
M1 Lifting tool 08A17
M2 Grinding ring 08A21
M3 Stand for exhaust valve 08A55
M4 Lifting tool for exhaust valve spindle 08A13
M5 Measuring tool for advance angle 08B73
M6 Spanner for thrust piece of H.P. pipe 08B81
M7 Box spanner for hydraulic actuator 08B86
Page 4 (8) When referring to this page, please quote Plate 90861 Edition 27Md
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve - Tools Plate 90862-27M
C 4X-36072
Plate 90862-27M Exhaust Valve - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
077 Hydraulic tools for exhaust valve studs -
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Exhaust Valve - Extra Tools Plate 90863-0008M
016
C 4X-36072
Plate 90863-0008M Exhaust Valve - Extra Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
016 Worktable*) (08A56)
*)Optional extra
C 4X-36072
S60MC-C Fuel Pum Settings 109-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0009
109-1 Fuel Pum Settings
X Stopped engine Risk of hot surfaces
X Block the starting mechanism Risk of severe personal injury

(while engine being truned)
Naked flames prohibited
X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 One shim alters pmax 0.15-0.20 MPa

(1.5-2.0 bar)
D-2 Normal shim thickness 0.5 mm
D-3 Max. number of shims 18
When referring to this page, please quote Data D10901 Edition 0009Md Page 1 (2)
4X-12525
109-1 Fuel Pum Settings S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data D10901 Edition 0009Md
4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Settings 909-1.3
Adjustment
Fuel Pump Settings
S60MC-C
0239
Adjustment
909-1.3
Before adjustment of the fuel pump is carried 1.

out, see Volume I, Chapter 706, also the fuel
cam lead should be checked, see Procedure
909-3.1.
pmax adjustment:
1. Before Maximum Combustion Pressure

(pmax) is adjusted, loosen the drain oil pipe
from the top cover and dismount the top cover
fixing nuts.
Remove the two screws in the threaded

holes of the top cover.
HN909-1.3 208 01
2. Screw the two dismantling screws (from the
tool panel) into the theaded holes of the top
cover, thus lifting the top cover to provide
space for inserting or removing shims. 3.
3. To increase pmax, remove shims.

(advance injection)
To decrease pmax, insert shims.

(delay injection)
One shim will alter pmax approximately as

given in Data D-1.
For nominal shim thickness, see Data D-2.
For maximum inserted number of shims,

GN909-1.3 205 02
see Data D-3.
Note down the new total shim thickness

(number of shims).
4.
4. Remove the dismantling screws, and press
down the top cover by hand. Mount the two
original screws to protect the threaded
holes. Mount and tighten the nuts for the
top cover, see procedure 909-5.
Note!
The individual pmax value must not deviate

more than 0.3 MPa (3 bar) from the aver-
age value for all cylinders.
GN909-1.3 205 03
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 909-1.3Edition 0239M Page 1 (2)
C 4X-12525
909-1.3 Fuel Pump Settings S60MC-C
Adjustment
5. If the required pmax adjustment cannot be

attained by inserting or removing shims, it
is possible to carry out the adjustment on
the fuel cam disc. Contact MITSUI ENGI-
NEERING & SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD. for
advice.
MIP adjustment:
5. The Mean Indicated Pressure (pi) for a cer-

tain cylinder is adjusted on the fuel pump
index arm.
EN909-1.3 239 05
Increase index for higher pi.
Decrease index for lower pi.
Note!
The mean indicated pressure is one of

the most important parameters,in
obtaining good engine performance.
The mean indicated pressure should
not deviate more than 0.05MPa (0.5
bar) from the average value for all cylin-
ders. See Volume I, Chapter 706.
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Cam 109-3
Data

Special
109-3 Data
0005 Fuel Pump Cam S60MC-C
X Stopped engine
X Shut off fuel oil
Data
When referring to this page, please quote Data D10903 Edition 0005Mf Page 1 (2)
4X-12525
109-3 Fuel Pump Cam S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data D10903 Edition 0005Mf
4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Cam 909-3.1
Checking
Fuel Pump Cam
S60MC-C
0228
Checking
909-3.1
1.
Fuel cam lead:
The lead C of the fuel cam is defined as the
number of mm the plunger is lifted from its bot-
tom position when the main piston is in TDC.
1. To measure the fuel cam lead (top lift):

Dismantle the suction valve and the
puncture valve.
Make sure that the reversing mechanism is

in AHEAD direction.
EN909-3.1 228 00
2. Push down the measuring pin through the
top cover, until it rests against the pump
plunger.
Turn the engine until the lowest point of the

cam is found, use a calliper to find the 3.
point.
3. Measure the distance x from the top of the

measuring pin to the top cover.
Note down the result as x2.
4. Turn ahead until the main piston of the cyl-

inder concerned is in TDC.
Again measure the distance x from the top

of the measuring tool to the top cover. Note
down the result as x1.
Calculate the fuel cam lead C (top lift) as:
C = x1 - x2 (mm)
JG909-2.1 92 02
5. Note down the result for comparison with

the testbed results and for future reference.
For adjustment of the fuel cam lead, see
Procedure 909-3.3.
Remount the suction and the puncture 4.

valve.
NA906-7.0 56 01
C 4X-12525
909-3.3 Fuel Pump Cam S60MC-C
Adjustment
Adjustment
909-3.3
1. Normally, adjustment of the fuel cam should not

be necessary. Before adjustment of fuel equip-
ment, see Volume I, Chapter 706.
1. Remove the inspection cover from the

camshaft housing.
Note!
Before dismantling any part of the fuel

pump, make sure that the pump has
been relieved of pressure and that all oil
HN909-3.3 207 01
has been drained off.
2. Dismount the puncture valve and the suc-

tion valve from the fuel pump top cover, and
mount the measuring tool.
2.
3. Turn the camshaft until there is access to

the oil ducts in the fuel cam through the in-
spection hole.
If fitted, remove the plugs from the oil ducts

(using, for instance, a screwdriver).
Insert three copper gaskets in each oil duct.
Mount snap-on couplings in the oil ducts,

but do not tighten them.
BM909-1.1 236 03
Fit hoses between the snap-on couplings

and the distributor block and between the
distributor block and the hydraulic high-
pressure pump.
3.
HN909-3.3 207 04L0a
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Cam 909-3.3
Adjustment
4. Mount the special spanner on the fuel cam 4.

disc, ensuring that the two pins enter the
holes in the cam.
Apply a light pressure to the hydraulic

system and, after venting the system,
tighten the snap-on couplings.
Raise the hydraulic pressure until oil seeps

out along the camshaft under the cam disc.
Keep the cam pressurised for at least five

minutes before turning the cam.
Hn909-3.3 207 06L0a

Keep the cam pressurised during turning.
Turn the cam disc, using the fitted spanner,

until the desired change of lead is obtained.
To increase lead and p max:

- turn the cam disc AHEAD.
To reduce lead and p max:

- turn the cam disc ASTERN.
5. After completing the desired turning of the

cam disc, relieve the hydraulic system of
pressure and dismount the spanner and the
hydraulic equipment.
Wait at least 15 minutes - the cam must be

allowed time to “settle” - before mounting
the plugs again in the oil ducts of the cam
disc.
After carrying out adjustment, measure the

fuel cam lead again.
Note down and file the new results for pur-

poses of comparison with future measure-
ments and adjustment.
6. Mount the inspection cover on the camshaft

housing.
7. Mount a new O-ring on the puncture valve.

Mount the puncture valve and the fuel oil
high pressure pipes.
See Procedure 909-5.4 and 909-14.4.
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump 109-4
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0005
109-4 Fuel Pump
X Engage turning gear (while engine being truned)
X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Pump housing nuts

D-2 pump housing nuts

D-3 Weight of pump housing 170 kg
When referring to this page, please quote Data D10904 Edition 0005Mc Page 1 (2)
C 4X-12525
109-4 Fuel Pump S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data D10904 Edition 0005Mc
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump 909-4.2
Dismantling
Fuel Pump
S60MC-C
0207
Dismantling
909-4.2
2.
Note!

1. Dismantle the fuel pump top cover/plunger

barrel assembly. See Procedure 909-5.2.
2. Remove the fuel oil inlet pipe between the

fuel pump and the fuel oil inlet valve.
Discard the gaskets.
3. Remove the nuts at the base of the fuel

pump. GN909-4.2 207 02
Mount the lifting tool and lift the fuel pump

housing away. See Data D-3.
3.
Note!
Take care not to damage the threads of

the studs.
Land the fuel pump on wooden planks.

GN909-4.2 207 03
4X-12525
909-4.3 Fuel Pump S60MC-C
Overhaul
Overhaul
909-4.3
1. 1. Tilt the fuel pump housing into a horizontal

position on the wooden planks.
2. Remove the bottom plate from the fuel

pump housing.
If the bottom plate sticks, loosen it by

screwing two M10 x 110 mm screws into
the threaded holes of the bottom plate.
3. Dismantle the:
• Fuel oil index arm

GN909-4.3 207 01 L0a
• Regulating guide
2.
GN909-4.3 207 02 L0a
3.
GN909-4.3 207 03 L0a
4X-12525
Overhaul
4. Dismantle and inspect the erosion plugs on 4.

both sides of the fuel pump housing.
If heavily eroded, replace the erosion plugs.
5. Clean all the parts in diesel oil or kerosene.

Blow dry with compressed air.
Warning!
Always use eye protection when working
GN909-4.3 204 04 L0a

with compressed air.
6. Mount a new sealing ring in the pointer for

the fuel oil index arm.
6.
Note!
Soak the sealing ring in lubricating oil

before mounting.
7. Clean all inside surfaces of the fuel pump

housing.
GN909-4.3 204 06
4X-12525
909-4.3 Fuel Pump S60MC-C
Overhaul
9. 8. Lubricate the following with molybdenum

disulphide grease (MoS 2):
• All internal surfaces of the fuel pump

housing.
• The sliding surfaces of all the parts of the

regulating system.
• The teeth of the:

- Regulating guide
- Fuel index arm
GN909-4.3 207 09 L0a
9. Mount the fuel oil index arm.
Adjust the position of the fuel oil index arm

so that the scratch mark on the fuel oil
index arm is aligned with the centre of the
10. fuel pump housing.
10. Mount the regulating guide in the fuel pump

housing, ensuring that the scratch mark on
the regulating guide is aligned with the
scratch mark on the fuel oil index arm.
11. Mount the bottom plate on the fuel pump

housing.
GN909-4.3 207 10 L0b
11.
GN909-4.3 207 11 L0a
4X-12525
Mounting
Mounting
909-4.4
1.
Note!
Before mounting the fuel pump housing,

make sure that all sliding faces and
threads are cleaned and lubricated with
molybdenum disulphide grease (MoS 2).
D-1
D-2
1. Coat the liquid gasket “Three Bond 1211”
on the seat between the pump base and the
fuel pump housing.
Lower the fuel pump housing on to the

pump base, taking care not to damage the
threads of the studs.
Remove the lifting tool.
Mount and tighten the nuts at the base of

GN909-4.4 204 02 L0a
the fuel pump housing. See Data D-1, D-2.
2. Mount the fuel oil inlet pipe between the

fuel pump and the fuel inlet valve.
3. Mount the fuel pump top cover/plunger- 2.

barrel assembly.
GN909-4.4 207 03
4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Top Cover 109-5
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0005
109-5 Fuel Pump Top Cover
X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Weight of barrel/plunger+

top cover 118 kg
D-2 Top cover nuts

D-3 Top cover studs

- screw-in torque 240 Nm
D-4 Pump barrel/top cover

D-5 Puncture valve

D-6 Fuel oil high-pressure pipe

D-7 Diameter of seat

- max. grinding 26 mm
MITSUI ENIGINEERING & SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD.
C 4X-12525
109-5 Fuel Pump Top Cover S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Top Cover 909-5.2
Dismantling
Fuel Pump Top Cover
S60MC-C
0208
Dismantling
909-5.2
1.
1. Close the oil inlet valve to the fuel oil pump
and drain the pump.
Dismount the drain oil pipe from the top

cover and the air pipe connection to the
puncture valve.
Dismount the high pressure pipes.
Dismount the puncture valve with suction

valve from the top cover.
Dismount the fuel index pointer.
GN909-5.2 208 01
At this stage, it is practical to measure the
lead of the fuel pump.
2. Remove the top cover fixing nuts, as well 2.

as the two screws in the top cover.
Loosen the top cover by means of the two

dismantling screws from the tool panel.
Release the link for the regulating drive and

pull out the toothed rack as far as possible.
GN909-5.2 205 03
4X-12525
909-5.2 Fuel Pump Top Cover S60MC-C
Dismantling
In case of the sticking (seizure) of the plunger.
Note!
pulling of the regulating toothed rack is

carried out by means of the tackle of 0.5
ton
When using the tackle, the pulling work
should be carried out while measuring
0.5 ton the dimension A.
Pull out length for toothed rack:57mm.
After confirming that the roller guide is

GN909-5.2 208 04L0a
placed at the “lifting up” position by the lift-

ing device, the pulling work should be car-
A ried out. See Procedure 909-10.
Even if the engagement of the plunger and

the roller guide was disconnected, the
sticked plunger may not be lifted up.
Then, leave the plunger as it is.
When pulling of the regulating toothed rack

is impossible even using of the tackle of 0.5
ton, contact the MITSUI ENGINEERING &
SHIPBUILDING CO,.LTD.
4X-12525
Dismantling
3. Mount the lifting tool (Tool No. 09B12) on 3.

the fuel pump top cover. Screw the center
screw of the tool into the pump plunger.
Ensure that the stop ring on the center
screw is loose.
Pull the center screw of the tool to lift the

plunger clear of the bayonet joint in the
roller guide and the milled recess of the
regulating guide.
To do this it may be necessary to move the

toothed rack and the center screw of the
tool in relation to each other.
When the plunger has been lifted clear of
GN909-5.2 208 04
the roller guide and regulating guide, lock
the center screw in this position with the
stop ring.
4. Lift the top cover and barrel with plunger 4.

out of the fuel pump housing as an one unit,
D-1. Remove the shims if any.
5. Set up the pump unit in a bench vice pro-

D-1
vided with “soft” jaws. Dismount the lifting
tool. Take care that the plunger does not
slide out of the barrel.
Press the plunger to the top of the barrel

and remove the barrel/plunger assembly
from the top cover.
Send the barrel/plunger assembly to MIT-

SUI ENGINEERING & SHIPBUILDING
CO., LTD. for overhaul, or overhaul it on
GN909-5.2 205 05
board.
5.
GN909-5.2 205 06
4X-12525
Overhaul
Overhaul
909-5.3
1.
1. Remove and discard the seal rings.
D-7 Carefully clean and examine the top cover.
a
Reconditioning of the seatings for the high-
pressure pipes is carried out by grinding
b according to the following procedure:
c
a Fill the oil ducts in the top cover with Vase-
line or heavy grease.
c b
During the work the grind is guided by
mount the guide in the hole for the high-
pressure pipe.
For the max. grinding diameter of the seat,

see Data D-7.
2. After completing the grinding, blow out the

Vaseline/grease from the oil ducts by
means of compressed air.
GN909-5.3 208 01 L0a
Warning!

2.
Clean the top cover with diesel oil, and

blow dry with compressed air.
GN909-5.3 205 02
4X-12525
Overhaul
3. Mount the seal rings in the ring grooves. 3.
seal between the top cover and the fuel

pump housing is provided by an O-ring.
seal between the top cover and pump

barrel is provided by two back-up rings and
an O-ring in between.
Prepare the back-up rings by twisting the

rings in the hand, in such a way that the
diameter of the rings becomes smaller than
the diameter of the ring groove in which the
GN909-5.3 205 03
rings are to be mounted.
“Screw” the back-up rings onto the top cov-

er, into the groove.
Finally, insert the O-ring between the back- 4.

up rings in the ring groove. D-4
Mount the O-ring which seals between top
cover/fuel pump housing.
4. Mount the overhauled top cover on top of

the pump barrel, guided by the guide pin.
Tighten the screws, see Data D-4.
GN909-5.2 205 06
4X-12525
Mounting
Mounting
909-5.4
1. 1. Mount the supplied measuring pin on the

center screw of the lifting tool (Tool No.
09B12). Loosen the stop ring on the center
screw.
Place the tool on the pump housing and

press down the center screw until the mea-
suring pin reaches the thrust piece of the
roller guide. Lock the center screw in this
position with the stop ring.
Keep the stop ring tightened in this position

until the plunger has been correctly mount-
ed.
GN909-5.4 208 01
Note!
The engine must not be turned until the

mounting of the barrel/plunger assembly
2. has been completed.
2. Remove the tool from the pump housing

and remove the measuring pin from the
center screw.
Mount the tool on the barrel/plunger and

top-cover assembly.
Tighten the tool to the top cover by means

of the two screws, and attach the plunger to
the center screw.
The tool is now firmly attached to the ssem-

bly, enabling the correct position to be ob-
tained during mounting.
Pull the regulating toothed rack out as far

as possible.
Pull the plunger as high up in the barrel as

possible.
GN909-5.4 208 02
Carefully lower the assembly into the pump

housing (taking special care not to damage
the O-ring and back-up rings on the barrel).
Adjust the top cover so that the guide pin

enters the hole in the pump housing. Lower
the top cover on to the pump housing.
4X-12525
Mounting
3. Press the plunger down into contact with 3.

the thrust piece of the roller guide.
If necessary, turn the regulating guide a lit-

tle (using the toothed rack) to make the foot
and regulating block of the plunger fit prop-
erly in the cutout of the regulating guide.
Check that the stop ring of the center screw

is in full contact with the flange of the tool,
as when measuring.
When the plunger is in place, press the reg-
GN909-5.4 208 03
ulating toothed bar in, causing the plunger
foot to interlock with the bayonet joint of the
roller guide.
Check through the inspection cover on the

fuel pump base and by pulling the center 4.
screw of the tool, that the plunger is cor-
rectly engaged.
When pulling on the center screw it must

not be possible to lift the plunger more than
a few mm.
4. Unscrew the center screw from the plunger

and remove the tool from the top cover.
5. Screw the two dismantling screws from the

tool panel into the threaded holes of the top
cover, thus lifting the top cover to provide
GN909-5.4 208 04
space for inserting shims.
6. Insert shims between the pump housing

and the top cover. (If the barrel assembly is
the same as that dismounted, insert the 5.
same number of shims as were removed).
If a new barrel assembly is mounted, insert
the number of shims specified in the test
bed report.
GN909-1.3 205 02
4X-12525
Mounting
7. 7. Replace the dismantling screws with the

two screws for mounting the lifting tool, and
press down the top cover.
Mount the nuts for fastening the top cover,

tightening them diagonally, see Data D-2.
If any of the fuel pump top cover studs have

come loose, screw-in them, see Data D-3.
8. Measure the fuel pump lead and adjust the

number of shims, if necessary.
9. Mount the puncture valve with the suction

valve in the top cover, see Data D-5.
Connect the drain oil pipe to the top cover

and the air pipe connection to the puncture
valve.
Mount the two high-pressure pipes on the

top cover/fuel valves, see Data D-6.
GN909-5.4 205 07
Mount the fuel index pointer.
Mount the link for the regulating drive.

9.
Open the fuel oil inlet.
GN909-5.4 208 09
4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Barrel Assembly 109-6
Data

Special Data
S60MC-C
0005
109-6 Fuel Pump Barrel Assembly
X Stopped engine
X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Weight of barrel assembly 47 kg
D-2 Weight of plunger 12 kg
C 4X-12525
109-6 Fuel Pump Barrel Assembly S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Barrel Assembly 909-6.3
Overhaul
Fuel Pump Barrel Assembly
S60MC-C
0207
Overhaul
909-6.3
2.
1. For dismantling of fuel pump barrel assem-
bly, see Procedure 909-5.2 (fuel pump top
cover).
2. Set up the pump unit in a bench vice

D-1
provided with ‘soft’ jaws (see Data D-1).
Remove and discard the O-ring on the bar-

rel.
3. Pull the plunger carefully out of the barrel

(see Data D-2).
GN909-6.3 205 01 L0a

Carefully clean the plunger (for example in
clean kerosene) and blow it dry with com-
pressed air.
3.
Warning!

Check the plunger for wear or seizure D-2

marks.
Clean the barrel and blow it dry with com-

pressed air.
Check the barrel for wear or seizure marks.

GN909-6.3 205 02 L0a
Note!
If either plunger or barrel shows signs of

wear or seizure marks, both parts must
be replaced, as they are ground to match
and cannot be replaced individually.
C 4X-12525
909-6.3 Fuel Pump Barrel Assembly S60MC-C
Overhaul
4. 4. Mount a new O-ring.
5. Lubricate the plunger with molybdenum dis-

ulphide grease (MoS 2).
Carefully slide the plunger into the barrel

and press it to the bottom.
Note!
Do not use force as this will damage the

GN909-6.3 205 03 L0a
sliding surface of the plunger or barrel.
If the barrel assembly is not to be mounted

immediately, all openings must be covered
with plastic to prevent dirt from entering the
5. barrel assembly during storage.
For mounting of fuel pump barrel assembly,

see Procedure 909-5.4 (fuel pump top cov-
er).
GN909-6.3 205 04 L0a
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Suction Valve 109-7
Data

Special Data
S60MC-C
0003
109-7 Fuel Pump Suction Valve
Stopped engine
Block the starting mechanism
Shut off starting air supply
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
C 4X-12525
109-7 Fuel Pump Suction Valve S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Suction Valve 909-7.3
Overhaul
Fuel Pump Suction Valve
S60MC-C
0205
Overhaul
909-7.3
1.
1. Set up the suction valve in a bench vice
with “soft” jaws and press down the spring
by means of the cone to release the valve
spindle from the two-part conical ring.
Clean the parts thoroughly in clean diesel

oil and blow dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect the seat on the valve spindle and

the seat on the valve housing for damage.
If the seats are damaged, a new or recon-
GN909-7.3 205 01 L0a

ditioned suction valve must be fitted. (Send
the damaged valve to MITSUI ENGINEER-
ING & SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD. for recon-
ditioning).
3. After cleaning and inspecting all the parts,

lubricate these with molybdenum disul- 2.
phide (MoS 2) and assemble the suction
valve.
Check the seats for tightness by filling the

inlet hole with diesel oil and waiting 5 min-
utes. No oil may pass through the seats.
GN909-7.3 205 02 L0a
3.
GN909-7.3 205 03 L0a
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Puncture Valve 109-8
Data

Special Data
S60MC-C
0006
109-8 Fuel Pump Puncture Valve
Stopped engine
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
C 4X-12525
109-8 Fuel Pump Puncture Valve S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Puncture Valve 909-8.3
Overhaul
Fuel Pump Puncture Valve
S60MC-C
0205
Overhaul
909-8.3
1.
1. Remove and discard the O-ring from the
puncture valve housing.
Set up the puncture valve in a bench vice

with “soft” jaws.
x4
Loosen and remove the four screws and
dismount the plug.
Mount a pulling tool (Tool No. 09B50) in the

air piston and remove the air piston from
the housing.
Remove and discard the seal rings from the

air piston.
Disassemble the other parts of the puncture

valve and discard the O-rings from the plug
and the flexible connection. Clean all the
parts thoroughly in clean diesel oil.
GN909-8.3 205 01 L0b
Check all seats in the valve housing and on

the valve slide, and recondition, if necess-
ary.
2. Mount the two O-rings in the each ring

groove on the rod of the air piston and pos-
tion. the large cone on the rod. Place the 2.
seal ring on the cone and, by means of the
pusher, push the seal ring on to the O-rings
in the groove. Remove the pusher and the
large cone.
Finally, compress the seal ring by means of

the ‘sizer’.
GN909-8.3 205 02 L0b
C 4X-12525
909-8.3 Fuel Pump Puncture Valve S60MC-C
Overhaul
3. 3. Mount the O-ring in the ring groove on top

of the piston. Position the cone on the pis-
ton head.
Place the seal ring on the cone and, using

the pusher, push the seal ring onto the O-
ring in the groove.
Remove the pusher and the cone.
Finally, compress the seal ring by means of

the ‘sizer’.
4. Before assembling the puncture valve, lu-

bricate all parts with molybdenum disul-
phide, (MoS2). Mount new O-rings on the
housing.
Mount the spring and air piston in the upper

housing and assemble the two housings by
means of the plug and the four screws.
GN909-8.3 205 03 L0b
4.
x4
GN909-8.3 205 04 L0b
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Shock Absorber 109-9
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0005
109-9 Fuel Pump Shock Absorber
X Stopped engine May cause spring under tension
X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Shock absorber weight 22 kg
C 4X-12525
109-9 Fuel Pump Shock Absorber S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Shock Absorber 909-9.1
Checking
Fuel Pump Shock Absorber
S60MC-C
0205
Checking
909-9.1
To ensure satisfactory operation, the function-

ing of the fuel oil system shock absorber should
be checked at regular intervals. Normally, in-
spection is necessary only at the intervals stat-
ed in the maintenance programme. The checks
should be carried out while the engine is oper-
ating.
1. Remove the plug from the end cover of the

shock absorber. Check that air is ‘pulsating’
through the threaded hole.
GN909-9.1 205 00 L0a

Short bursts of air should be felt against the
hand, corresponding to the strokes of the
fuel pump.
The air pulses occur when the shock ab-

sorber piston is working and the air below
the piston is being compressed and forced
out through the threaded hole.
2. To check the ‘tightness’ of the piston, mea-

sure the amount of leakage oil flowing from
the drain pipe of the shock absorber hous-
ing. Note down the amounts measured and
compare with earlier measurements.
Increasing amounts indicate a deteriorating

piston seal. Excessive amounts indicate
that the shock absorber requires overhaul-
ing.
C 4X-12525
909-9.3 Fuel Pump Shock Absorber S60MC-C
Overhaul
Overhaul
909-9.3
1.
Note!

1. Remove the shock absorber drain pipe.

Loosen the screws holding the shock ab-
sorber and remove it from the fuel pump
housing.
GN909-9.3 205 01 L0a
2. Remove the plug from the end cover of the

shock absorber. Fit a threaded rod between
the piston and the end cover to counteract
the force of the springs. Loosen the screws
2. of the end cover and remove the end cover
and piston. Discard the gasket.
3. Loosen the nut on the threaded rod to re-

lieve the springs and remove the threaded
rod. Remove and discard the seal ring in
the shock absorber housing and the wear
ring on the piston.
4. Clean all parts and polish the sliding surfac-

es of the piston and the shock absorber
housing. Mount a new seal ring in the shock
absorber housing and a new wear ring on
GN909-9.3 205 02 L0a
the piston.
5. Mount the springs and the spring guide be-

tween the end cover and the piston, using
the threaded rod.
4.
Lubricate all sliding surfaces and assemble
the shock absorber. Take care not to dam-
age the seal ring when mounting the piston.
Check that the piston slides easily in the
shock absorber housing.
6. Mount the end cover. Remove the threaded

rod and insert the plug.
GN909-9.3 205 04 L0b
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Shock Absorber 909-9.3
Overhaul
7. Fit a new gasket and mount the shock ab-

sorber. Mount the shock absorber drain
pipe.
If an excessive amount of drain oil is still

observed after the overhaul, the shock ab-
sorber must be replaced and the damaged
one sent to an authorized MITSUI ENGI-
NEERING & SHIPBUILDING for recondi-
tioning.
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Lifting Gear for Roller Guide 109-10
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0011
109-10 Lifting Gear for Roller Guide

Shut off fuel oil
Data
C 4X-12525
109-10 Lifting Gear for Roller Guide S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Lifting Gear 909-10.1
Checking
Lifting Gear
S60MC-C
0205
Checking
909-10.1
1.
Warning!
Do not use the lifting tool for the fuel

pump roller guide while the engine is run-
ning.
If a fuel pump is to be put out of action, dis-

connect it in the following manner:
1. Stop the engine and engage the turning

gear.
HN909-10.1 205 01
Remove the inspection cover on the upper
part of the camshaft housing in front of the
fuel cam for the pertaining roller guide.
Turn the engine until the roller is in the 2.

highest position on the cam (on the circular
section of the cam).
2. Loosen the lock screw on top of the flange

and the nut on the lifting tool.
Press the shaft against the roller guide.

When the shaft has been pressed fully in,
the guide screw is positioned in line with
the vertical slot of the flange.
HM909-5.0 44 01bL0a
C 4X-12525
909-10.1 Lifting Gear S60MC-C
Checking
3. 3. Mount the chain wheel on the shaft, with

the chain in such a position that when pull-
ing at the chain, the chain wheel and shaft
will turn anti-clockwise until the guide screw
is in top of the slot, which indicates that the
roller guide is in the lifted position.
Lock the shaft in this position by tightening

the lock screw and the nut on the lifting
tool.
Check through the inspection cover open-

ing that the roller guide is clear of the fuel
HM909-5.0 44 02aL0a
cam. The engine can now operate on the

remaining cylinders, see Vol. 1, Section
704.
Re-engagement of the fuel pump roller guide

4.
Warning!
Re-engagement of the fuel pump roller

guide must only take place when the
engine is at a standstill.
4. Turn the engine until the circular section of

the pertaining fuel cam is positioned up-
wards, and then lower the roller guide in the
reverse order to lifting.
HM909-5.0 44 02b
Note!
Remember to loosen the lock screw.

5.
Remove the tackle and the chain wheel
from the lifting tool.
5. When the roller guide has been lowered

into the position where the guide screw is
in the lowermost position, tighten the lifting
tool nut against the flange whereby the lift-
ing tool will be pulled away from the roller
guide. The guide screw will now be posi-
tioned at the end of the horizontal part of
the slot of the flange.
HN909-10.1 205 05L0a
Tighten the lock screw.
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Valve 109-11
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0004
109-11 Fuel Valve
X Block the starting mechanism Risk of hot surfaces
X Shut off starting air supply Naked flames prohibited
Engage turning gear
X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Max. diameter 25 mm
D-2 Weight of fuel valve 13 kg
D-3 Opening pressure 35 ± 3.0 MPa

(350 ± 30 bar)
When referring to this page, please quote Data D10911 Edition 0004Mg Page 1 (2)
4X-12525
109-11 Fuel Valve S60MC-C
Data
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Data D10911 Edition 0004Mg
4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Valve 909-11.1
Checking
Fuel Valve
S60MC-C
0222
Checking
909-11.1
The fuel valves must be given the utmost atten- 1.

tion and care, as the greater part of irregulari-
ties that may occur during the running of the
engine can be attributed to defects in these
valves.
If the engine gives normal performance in ac-

cordance with diagrams and exhaust tempera-
tures, it is only necessary to inspect the fuel
valves after the service period stated in the
Checking and Maintenance Programme.
See Chapter 900-1.
In order to obtain reliable results during testing

of the fuel valves, all fuel valves that are dis-
9b10219M01
mantled from the engine must be disassem-
bled, cleaned, inspected and re-assembled
before testing. See Procedure 909-11.3 and
909-12.3.
2.
Note!
In the event that the slide-type fuel valve

is pressure tested without being cleaned
between the fuel nozzle and the cut-off
slide, the opening pressure value mea-
sured might be considerably lower than
specified.
All fuel valves must be function-tested before

being mounted in the cylinder cover.
HM909-6.3 70 01a
1. Equipment demands
1.1 Test pump unit:

Regarding operation of the test pump unit,
see the supplier’s insutructions.
1.2 Prescribed oil:

Hydraulic oil (rust-preventing) with a vis-
cosity of between 7 and 10 Cst at 50°C
Note!
Use clean oil only.
2. Spring housing
To ensure that overtightening has not taken

place, check that the locking/indicating pin
has not been bent or broken off.
In the event of overtightening, replace the

spring housing by a new one.
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90911 Edition 0222Mf Page 1 (17)
C 4X-12525
909-11.1 Fuel Valve S60MC-C
Checking
3. 3. Setting-up the fuel valve
Place the fuel valve in the holder and se-

cure it with the spring housing and nuts.
Tighten the nuts until the top face of the
pressure disc is flush with the top face of
the spring housing. Mount the high-pres-
sure hose between the pressure testing
pump and the fuel valve.
4. Pressure testing procedure
The subsequent items must be followed in

the sequence stated. Items 5, 7, 8 and 9
are each divided into the following five sub-
9b1216M03
items:
A. Objective
5.
B. Procedure
C. Acceptance criteria
D. Cause of fault
E. Other description
5E 5. Flushing
5B-1
Handle
5B-1 A. Objective:
Remove air in the system.

5E
B. Procedure:
Set the air pressure by 0.1 MPa (1 bar) by

5D the requlator.
5D Operate the lever of change valve by push-

ing/pulling repeatedly until non air mixed oil
flow out from drain hole of top cover.
9b10219M05
Page 2 (17) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90911 Edition 0222Mf
C 4X-12525
Checking
C. Acceptance criteria: 5.
No oil leakage from nozzle holes.
D. Cause of fault:
If the oil leakage occurred from nozzle

holes in the above point C, incorrect fitting
of fuel valve on test device is considered. 5E
5B-1
E. Other description: Handle

5B-1
If the oil is not flow out from drain hole on

top cover, the vent hole of thrust piece is 5E
closed by defective slide valve in the non-
return valve.
5D
5D
9b10219M05
C 4X-12525
Checking
6. 6. Atomization test
Note!
Do not attempt to carry out an atomiza-
tion test on slide type fuel valves, as this
may damage the cut-off slide and nozzle.
The reason is that the atomization test may

damage the valve because it makes the
needle oscillate, with a small lift at a very
high frequency. The high pressure drop
across the cut-off edge and the high con-
tact pressure between slide and fuel noz-
MN909-11.1 222 06 L0a
zle, in combination with the poor lubricity of

the test oil, increase the risk of seizures be-
tween cut-off slide and nozzle.
At of these conditions involve the risk of
seizure between the cut-off slide and noz-
zle.
7.
7. Opening pressure
A. Objective:
D-3 To check the opening pressure.
B. Procedure:
Set the air pressure to about 0.6 MPa (6
7C
bar) by regulator.
Handle
7B Increase the oil pressure by pulling the le-
7B
ver slowly until the oil can be observed
through the nozzle hole.
C. Acceptance criteria:
Check the opening pressure on the pres-
sure gauge.
D. Cause of fault:
7C If the opening pressure is higher than

specified in D-3, the cause may be that a
9b10222M07a
Additional wrong type of spring is used - replace the

spring on the thrust spindle, if necessary,
replace the complete thrust spindle.
If the opening pressure is lower than
specified in D-3, the cause may be that the
spring has sagged - replace the spring, or
add a special thin disc.
Note!
Special thin discs are available as
spares.
If a spring or a disc has been changed, the

pressure testing procedure of the fuel valve
must be repeated from step 4.
C 4X-12525
Checking
8. Seal test and sliding function 8.
A. Objective:
To check the needle valve seat for tight-

ness and the slide for correct closing.
B. Procedure:
8B-2
8B-3
B-1.Set the air pressure to about 0.1 MPa
(1 bar) by the regulator. Handle
8B-2
B-2.While the lever of change valve is op- 8B-3
erating, adjust the regulator until the oil 8B-1
pressure is built up to about 8-10 MPa 8B-2
(80-100 bar) below the opening pres-
sure.
During the built up pressure is main-
tained about 10 seconds, observe the
nozzle holes.
B-3.Push the lever at the oil pressure is

8C-1
built up condition, observe the pres-
sure gauge of hydraulic oil and leakage
of hydraulic oil from the drain hole of
the valve head.
8D-1”2”
8D-2
C. Accepatance Criteria:
C-1.Seal test
Oil must not be leaked from the nozzle

8D-1”2”
holes.
It shows the normal condition that the

leak oil flows out from the drain hole of
the valve head.
C-2.Sliding test
The pressure drops relativery slowly to

about 1.5 MPa (15 bar), after which it
8D-1”2”
drops guickly to 0 MPa (0 bar) because
the slide valve in the spindle guide is
pressed against the conical seat and
the vent hole for circulation of oil is 8D-1”1”
made open. 8D-1”1”
(It can be judged two from increasing
of the leak oil from the drain hole when
the fuel valve is full of oil.)
9b10219M08
C 4X-12525
Checking
8. D. Cause of fault:
D-1.Seal test
If oil flows out of the nozzle holes, the

cause is either:
• Defective spindle guide at needle

8B-2 seat, or a sticking spindle. Examine
8B-3 and/or re-place the spindle guide.
Handle
8B-2
8B-3 • Too quick pressure drop:
8B-1 - the clearances of the movable parts,
8B-2
both of the spindle guide and of the
non-return valve, are too large, or
- the seats between the thrust piece/

spindle in the spindle guide or thrust
piece/valve slide in the non-return
valve are damaged.
8C-1
Examine and/or replace both the spin-
dle guide and non-return valve.
See Procedure 909-12.3 and 909-13.3.
8D-1”2”
8D-2
D-2.Sliding function
The pressure drops relatively slowly to

about 1.5 MPa (15 bar), after which it
drops quickly to 0 (the slide is pressed
8D-1”2” against the conical seat and opens for
circulation oil).
Note!
There will always be an oil flow from the

leak oil outlet when the fuel valve is full of
oil.
8D-1”2”
If a quick pressure drop from 1.5 MPa (15
bar) to 0 MPa (0 bar) cannot be registered:
8D-1”1” • The valve slide is sticking; or
8D-1”1”
• the vent hole in the thrust piece is
blocked.
If so, disassemble and examine the non-re-

9b10219M08
turn valve, replace if necessary.

C 4X-12525
Checking
9. Pressure test, O-ring seals 9.
A. Objective:
This test is to ensure that the circulation oil re-

mains in the closed system. Max. 1 MPa (10 bar)
B. Procedure:
B-1.Fitting of plug 9B-1
If the drain oil flows out from the drain

hole of the fuel valve head by the fore go-
ing tests, the fuel valve is full of oil. Close
the drain hole with a drain plug under this
condition.
If the no drain oil flows out from the

drain hole, build up the hydraulic oil Max. 10 MPa (100 bar)
pressure of about max. 1 MPa (10 bar)
by setting of the regulator, and operate
the lever of change valve until the drain
oil flows out from the drain hole.
After confirming that, close the drain
hole with a drain plug.
B-2.Seal test
Operate the lever of change valve con-

tinuously.
Increase the hydraulic oil pressure to Max. 10 MPa (100 bar)
about 10 MPa (100 bar) by adjusting of
the regulator. 9B-2
While operating the lever, obsorve the
pressure gauge of hydraulic oil and the
oil leakage from the O-ring part.
B-3.After treatment of test
After completion of confirming the oil

leakage, set the regulator to 0 MPa (0
bar), and reduce the oil pressure by
slight loosening of the drain plug.
After that, remove the drain plug.
9D
Note!
The drain hole must be opened at normal

condition excepting the period of this test.
9b1216M09
C 4X-12525
Checking
9. C. Acceptance criteria:
• The build up pressure of about 10 MPa

(100 bar) should be maintained.
Max. 1 MPa (10 bar) • The leak oil from the O-ring part should not
be recognize.
D. Cause of fault:
9B-1
If oil leaks out at the union nut, the O-ring on
the valve head is defective, and must be re-
placed.
E. Other description:
In state of the fuel oil is not filled in the fuel

valve, it must be avoided that the oil pressure
Max. 10 MPa (100 bar) is raised up under plugged condition of the
drain hole because the slide valve will be
moved with violent shock.
Max. 10 MPa (100 bar)
9B-2
9D
9b1216M09
C 4X-12525
Dismantling
Dismantling
909-11.2
1. Close the fuel oil inlet and outlet valves, 1.

and drain the high-pressure pipe and the
fuel valve.
Unscrew the union nut by means of the

hook spanner and take the union nut with
protective hose up along the pipe. Unscrew
the union nipple at both ends of the pipe
(fuel valve and fuel pump).
Remove the high-pressure pipe.
Disconnect the return oil pipe from the fuel
HN909-11.2 206 01
valve.
2. Unscrew the nuts on the spring housings

and remove the housings.
3. Take out the valve. If the valve is sticking, 2.

use the fuel valve dismantling tool to pull
the fuel valve clear of the top cover.
If the valve is not to be overhauled immedi-

ately, the valve should be placed immersed
in diesel oil until overhauling.
HN909-11.2 206 02
3.
D-2
HN909-11.2 206 03
C 4X-12525
Overhaul
Overhaul
909-11.3
1. When fuel valves are overhauled, all parts

should be handled carefully and be kept clean.
Use only clean, non-fluffy rags for wiping pur-

poses. Make sure to remove all liquid or solid
impurities. Whenever fuel valves are over-
hauled, all seal rings should be discarded and
replaced by new, faultless seal rings before re-
assembly.
MN909-11.3 219 01
A
1. Measure the length A of the protruding part
of the nozzle, and write down the result for
correct re-assembling of the valve.
2. 2. Place the valve holder in a machine vice,

mount the fuel valve in the holder and fit the
valve with the guide disc from the grinding
tool.
3. Compress the fuel valve and the spring in-

side, by means of a drilling machine, to
avoid seizures in the union thread. Hold the
fuel valve compressed and unscrew the
union nut with a hook spanner.
Remove the valve from the valve holder.
If the machine vice on board is not avail-

able, the union nut for fuel valve can be
MN909-11.3 222 02
unscrewed with hook spanner or tommy bar

after mounting the fuel valve on the pres-
sure testing rig and tightening up it by stud
nut.
3. Take out the fuel valve from the pressure

testing rig.
MN909-11.3 222 03 L0a
C 4X-12525
Overhaul
4. Pull the valve head clear of the valve hous- 4.

ing.
Remove the:
• Non return valve
• Thrust spindle parts
• Thrust foot
• Spindle guide and fuel nozzle
from the valve housing.
Remove and discard all the O-rings.
NA909-11.3 215 01 L0a
C 4X-12525
Overhaul
5. 5. Carefully clean and examine all surfaces of

the:
• Fuel valve housing
• Fuel valve head

a
• Thrust spindle
b If necessary, grind the seating surfaces by

c D-1 means of the grinding mandrels supplied
a and a fine-grain abrasive (such as Carbo-
rundum No. 500).
b
c
This grinding must only be carried out man-
ually.
After the grinding, wash the parts in gas oil

and blow clean by means of compressed
air to remove any remains of the grinding
compound.
Grind the sealing surfaces for the high-

pressure pipe in the valve head by means
of the grinding tool.
If consist of guide, bush mandrel, emery

cloth and stamp. The grinding mandrel is
turned in the chuck of a portable drilling
machine etc.
Note!
Take care not to exceed the maximum

diameter of the seat, see Data.
GN909-11.3 204 02 L0b
C 4X-12525
Overhaul
6. The complete spindle guide, including the 6.

fuel nozzle, should be sent to an authorised
the MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIPBUILD-
ING CO., LTD. for repair shop for overhaul.
If this is not possible, the spindle guide may
be overhauled on board.
Note!
NA909-11.3 215 03
Do not attempt to remove the fuel nozzle
from the spindle guide unless the spindle
guide has been dismantled. Otherwise
the cut-off slide on the spindle may be
damaged. 7.
7. The non-return valve should be sent to an

authorised the MITSUI ENGINEERING &
SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD. for repair shop
for overhaul. If this is not possible, the non-
return valve may be overhauled on board.
8. Mount the complete spindle guide, includ-

ing the fuel nozzle, in the fuel valve hous-
MC909-6.1 99 04
ing.
Carefully slide the spindle guide down into

the valve holder, and turn the nozzle until
the spindle guide engages correctly with
the guide pin. Check that distance A corre- 8.
sponds to the measurement taken before
the valve was disassembled.
Note!
Make sure that the fuel nozzle and

spindle guide engage correctly with the
guide pin in the fuel valve housing. This
can be ascertained by attempting to turn
the nozzle after mounting. It must not be
possible to turn the nozzle.
MN909-11.3 219 05
C 4X-12525
Overhaul
9. 9. Mount:
• the thrust foot
• the parts of the thrust spindle
• the non-return valve
in the fuel valve housing.
Mount a new O-ring in the uppermost

groove of the fuel valve housing.
Lubricate the thread of the valve head with

molybdenum disulphide (MoS 2).
For the correct use of this lubricant, see
Procedure 913-11.
Fit the valve head with new O-rings.
10. Make sure that the guide pin between valve

housing and valve head is intact, and press
the valve head down into the valve housing.
See that the guide pin between valve hous-

NA909-11.3 215 01 L0a
ing and valve head engages correctly so as

to prevent relative turning of the parts.
10.
MC909-6.1 99 07
C 4X-12525
Overhaul
11. Assemble the valve by means of the union 11.

nut.
Place the valve in the valve holder in a drill-

ing machine.
Compress the fuel valve and the spring in-

side. Keep the valve compressed and tight-
en the union nut with a hook spanner.
If the machine vice on board is not avail-

able, the union nut for the fuel valve can be
tightened up with hook spanner or tommy
bar as same procedure when disassem-
bling the fuel valve on the pressure testing
rig.
After overhaul, the fuel valve must be test-

ed in the test rig.
12. If the fuel valve is not to be mounted in the

engine immediately after the overhaul, cov-
er all openings of the valve with plastic to
prevent dirt from entering the valve during
storage.
MN909-11.3 222 09
C 4X-12525
Mounting
Mounting
909-11.4
1. 1. Before mounting the fuel valve, thoroughly

clean the valve bore in the cylinder cover
and check the seating in the bore for marks
which, if any, must be eliminated.
(For reconditioning of valve bore in cylinder
cover, see Procedure 901-1).
If not already done, mount a new O-ring on

the valve head. Mount a new O-ring in the
groove on the valve housing.
Note!
HN909-11.4 206 01
On S60MC-C engines the O-ring should

be mounted in the lowermost groove.
On S70MC-C engines the O-ring should

2. be mounted in the uppermost groove.
Lubricate the valve with molybdenum disul-

phide (MoS 2).
2. Check that the locking/indicating pin in

each spring housing has not been bent or
broken off. This to ensure that overtighten-
ing has not taken place. In case of over-
tightening, discard the spring housing and
replace it by a new one.
HN909-11.4 206 02 L0a
3. Fit the spring housings and tighten the fix-

ing nuts till the top face of the pressure disc
is flush with the top face of the spring hous-
ing. This must be done with great care, as
the spring tension in the housing deter-
3. mines the correct tightening of the fuel
valve to the cylinder cover as well as the
correct compression of the fuel valve.
Note!
If the fuel valves are not correctly tight-

ened by the spring housings, this can
lead to malfunction of the fuel valve and,
ultimately, to cracked nozzles and high-
pressure pipes.
HN909-11.4 206 03 L0a
C 4X-12525
Mounting
4. Lubricate the thread on the union nipple of 4.

the fuel oil pipe with a heat resistant anti
seize grease before mounting.
Mount and tighten the fuel oil pipe.

Reconnect the return oil pipe to the fuel

valve.
Turn on the fuel oil supply.
HN909-11.4 206 03
Note!
All fuel valves must be function-tested

before being mounted in the cylinder
cover, see Procedure 909-11.1.
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Spindle Guide 109-12
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0004
109-12 Spindle Guide
Stopped engine Naked flames prohibited
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
C 4X-12525
109-12 Spindle Guide S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Spindle Guide 909-12.3
Overhaul
Spindle Guide
S60MC-C
0218
Overhaul
909-12.3
2.
Note!
This instruction is only valid for spindle

guides of the slide valve design.
Extreme care and accuracy should be

exercised when carrying out this opera-
tion.
Based on service experience it is recom-

mended to replace the complete spindle
guide after 16000 hours of operation.
1. Clean the outside of the spindle guide in pure

gas oil or similar. The individual parts of the
spindle guide are not interchangeable, there-
fore only one guide is to be disassembled at
a time.
MA909-6.2 111 02L0a
Note!
The spindle guide, thrust piece and spin-

dle are matched parts and may not be re-
placed individually.
3.
2. Place the spindle guide in a bench vice pro-
vided with “soft” jaws, and use the brass
mandrel as shown to disassemble the spin-
dle guide.
Provide to avoid falling the spindle guide on
the floor when separating from thrust piece.
3. Mount the pulling tool around the fuel noz-

zle on the spindle guide. Turn the nut to pull
the fuel nozzle off the spindle guide.
MA909-6.2 111 03
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90912 Edition 0218Mg Page 1 (5)
4X-12525
909-12.3 Spindle Guide S60MC-C
Overhaul
4. 4. Clean all the parts of the spindle guide in

gas oil and wipe dry with a clean piece of
cloth.
Clean all parts again in gas oil or “Electro-

cleaner” and wipe dry with a clean piece of
cloth.
Place all the parts on a clean, soft, lint-free

cloth and examine them through an 8-10
times magnification magnifying glass and
an in-spection lamp.
During the examination, pay special atten-

tion to the seating surfaces and sliding sur-
faces of the parts.
5. Remove any deposits or very fine scratches

by placing the spindle, thrust piece or spin-
dle guide respectively in a lathe, as shown,
and polishing with a very fine conventional
polishing linen “grade 360”.
MA909-6.2 111 04
Use also a little oil for the polishing (a

coarser polishing linen must absolutely not
be used).
5.
Note!
The Sliding surface of the cut-off slide

may only be polished very carefully. The
sliding surface must not be damaged.
After polishing, clean the parts again and

re-check the seat on thrust piece/spindle,
the seat on slide valve/spindle, and the seat
on spindle/guide. Use an inspection lamp
and an 8-10 times enlargement magnifying
glass.
MA909-6.2 111 05
If the seats are not in order, i.e. if there are

pressing-in marks or similar on the seats,
the complete spindle guide must be dis-
carded.
Page 2 (5) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90912 Edition 0218Mg
4X-12525
Overhaul
6. Clean any carbon deposits from the central 6.

bore of the fuel nozzle by means of the spe-
cial brass brush. Clean the spray holes, us-
ing gas oil and the special drills supplied.
Note!
During this operation be very careful not

to push the drill too far to avoid scratch-
ing the snug-fit surface on the inside of
the fuel nozzle.
Clean the fuel nozzle with kerosene and

wipe dry with a clean cloth.
Then test the spray holes with the test pin.

If the test pin is able to enter just one of the
holes, the fuel nozzle must be discarded.
This also applies to nozzles with oval holes

MN909-12.3 213 07
(can be ascertained with a magnifying

glass).
Check the fuel nozzle before mounting on

the spindle guide, the cut-off slide must be
able to move freely inside the nozzle.
Note!
It is recommended that the fuel nozzle is

changed whenever the spindle guide is
being overhauled or at maximum 8000
running hours.
4X-12525
909-12.3 Spindle Guide S60MC-C
Overhaul
8. 7. Lubricate the spindle and the thrust piece

with the cut-off slide with a little Molybde-
num Disulphide (MoS2), see Procedure
913-11.
8. Assemble the thrust piece, the spindle and

the spindle guide and carefully knock the
parts together using a soft hammer.
9. Shake the spindle guide back and forth.

The spindle with the cut-off slide must be
able to slide freely back and forth inside the
spindle guide, with a “clicking” sound.
MN909-12.3 215 09
9.
MN909-12.3 215 10
Page 4 (5) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure M90912 Edition 0218Mg
4X-12525
Overhaul
10. Lubricate the sliding surfaces of the nozzle 10.

and the spindle with a little Molybdenum
Disulphide (MoS 2). See Procedure 913-11.
Mount the nozzle on the spindle guide.
Make sure that the half-circle shaped

groove on the nozzle and the spring pin are
in line.
Spring pin
If nozzle and spindle guide are provided
with scratch marks opposite the spring pin,
they must be in line.
Place the parts on the plane of a drilling

machine or hydraulic press and position the
mounting tool over the parts. Make sure
that all the parts are perfectly aligned.
Scratch marks
Press the nozzle on to the spindle guide.
MN909-12.3 215 11L0a
Check that the spindle inside the spindle

guide is able to move freely as in step 9.
11. If the spindle guide is not to be mounted in a

fuel valve immediately after the overhaul, cov-
er all openings of the spindle guide with plas-
tic to prevent dirt from entering the spindle
guide during storage.
4X-12525
S60MC-C Non-return valve 109-13
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0017
109-13 Non-return valve
Stopped engine Naked flames prohibited
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
C 4X-12525
109-13 Non-return valve S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Non-return valve 909-13.3
Overhaul
Non-return valve
S60MC-C
0206
Overhaul
909-13.3
1.
Note!
Extreme care and accuracy should be

exercised when carrying out this opera-
tion.
1. Clean the outside of the non-return valve

with pure gas oil. The individual parts are
not interchangeable, therefore only one
guide is to be disassembled at a time.
GN909-13.3 203 01 L0a

Note!
Except for the slide valve spring, defec-

tive parts cannot be replaced individually A
2.
by new ones.
Place the non-return valve as shown in Fig.

1 in a bench vice provided with “soft” jaws,
and disassemble the non-return valve, us-
ing the disassembling tool and a hammer B C D
NB909-13.3 206 02
as shown.
2. Clean all the parts for the spindle guide in

gas oil and then blow clean.
Finally, clean in either gas oil, kerosene or 3.

“Electrocleaner”, and blow the parts dry
with compressed air as shown in Fig. 2.
3. Now place the parts on clean, lint-free rags

and examine with an 8-10 times enlarge-
ment magnifying glass, and an inspection
lamp with magnifying glass as shown in
Fig. 3.
MC909-6.3 99 03
C 4X-12525
909-13.3 Non-return valve S60MC-C
Overhaul
4. 4. Examine the slide faces of movable parts

for coating. Vent slide B/housing A will be
too tight if there is a coating. (The letters A-
D refer to the letters/parts in Fig. 2).
Fix vent slide B and, subsequently, housing

A in a lathe as shown in Fig. 4 and remove
the coating by means of very fine conven-
tional polishing linen “grade 360”.
Also a little oil should be used (a coarser

polishing linen must absolutely not be
used).
5. Check spring C for the thrust piece for out-

GN909-13.3 203 04
side wear marks. If defective, it should be

exchanged.
Check the seat on thrust piece D/vent slide,

and the seat on vent slide/housing. Use an
inspection lamp and an 8-10 times enlarge-
5.
ment magnifying glass.
Note!
Grinding the seat on slide valve and

housing should not be done on board due
to possible to change the relative seat
NA909-13.3 205 05L0a
angle between both.
If the seats are not in order, i.e. if there are

pressing-in marks or similar on the seats,
the complete spindle guide must be dis-
carded.
6.
6. Mount the non-return valve as follows:
• Lubricate all movable parts with molyb-

denum disulphide (MoS2).
• Place the loosely-assembled non-return

valve on the plane of a drilling machine,
with the tool positioned as shown in Fig.
6.
• Make sure that the thrust piece and the

other parts are perfectly aligned and that
the thrust piece is guided in the vent
slide.
• Press the handle until the housing and

thrust piece meet.
7. If the non-return valve is not to be mounted

GN909-13.3 203 06
in a fuel valve immediately after the over-

haul, cover all openings of the non-return
valve with plastic to prevent dirt from enter-
ing the valve during storage.
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Oil High-Pressure Pipe 109-14
Data

Special Data
S60MC-C
0006
109-14 Fuel Oil High-Pressure Pipe
X Stopped engine
Engage turning gear
X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Distance from pipe end to

thrust bushing lower edge
(fuel pump end and fuel valve
end) 14 mm
D-2 Weight of fuel oil pipe 11 kg
D-3 Fuel oil high pressure pipe

C 4X-12525
109-14 Fuel Oil High-Pressure Pipe S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Oil High-Pressure Pipe 909-14.2
Dismantling
Fuel Oil High-Pressure Pipe
S60MC-C
0207
Dismantling
909-14.2
2.
High-Pressure Pipe with Protective Hose
1. Close the fuel oil inlet and outlet valves.
2. Using a hook spanner, unscrew the union

nut at the fuel valve end of the high-pres-
sure pipe.
Pull the union nut and the protective hose

clear of the union nipple.
Unscrew the union nipple from the fuel

valve.
HN909-14.2 209 02
3. Using a hook spanner, unscrew the union
nut at the fuel pump end of the high-pres-
sure pipe.
Pull the union nut and the protective hose 3.

clear of the union nipple.
Unscrew the union nipple from the fuel

pump.
4. Lift the pipe ends clear of the fuel valve/fuel

pump, and remove the high-pressure pipe
from the engine.
Note!
HN909-14.2 209 03 L0a
It is recommended always to overhaul

the high-pressure pipe before remounting
it on the engine.
The overhaul should preferably take 4.

place immediately after the high-pres-
sure pipe has been dismantled.
HN909-14.2 209 04 L0a
C 4X-12525
909-14.3 Fuel Oil High-Pressure Pipe S60MC-C
Overhaul
Overhaul
909-14.3
1. 1. Whenever the fuel oil high-pressure system

has been dismantled, it is necessary, be-
fore remounting the high-pressure pipes, to
carefully inspect the tapered contact sur-
faces of the pipe ends, together with their
seats in fuel valves and fuel pump top cov-
D-1 er.
Futhermore, the position of the thrust bush-

ing on the pipe end must be checked.
If the distance is incorrect, compared with
the measurement stated in Data, it should
D-1
GN909-14.3 205 01 L0a
be adjusted by screwing the thrust bushing

up or down the pressure pipe.
2. If any of the pipe ends requires recondition-

ing, dismantle the high-pressure pipe as
follows:
2.
• Lift up the union nut with flexible protec-
tive hose, together with the coupling nut,
on the high-pressure pipe and screw off
the thrust bushing.
• Remove the coupling nut and, when the

thrust bushing at both ends of the pipe
have been dismounted, pull the flexible
protective hose with union nuts off the
high-pressure pipe.
3. Shape-up the threads on the pipe ends with

the nut die.
GN909-14.3 204 02
3.
GN909-14.3 204 03
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Oil High-Pressure Pipe 909-14.3
Overhaul
4. Tools for reconditioning of high-pressure 4.

pipes consist for each pipe dimension of:
Case, emery, guide sleeve and dice.
5. Reconditioning of the pipe ends is carried c a

b
out by the following procedures.
Mount the guide to the pipe end and cover

the grinding case which has been fitted a 46.5° 46.5°
emery cloth on the pipe end.
c a
GN909-14.3 204 04 L0a

The grinding is carried out so that the em- 87° b
ery cloth is pressed to the pipe end with
suitable force while turning the case fitted
the emery cloth.
The case is turned by means of a drilling
machine, etc.
Forming of
5. emery cloth
Forming of emery cloth:
φ80
Forming of the emery cloth is carried out by fold up on A C
the procedure shown on the illustration. center line
The conical part B is formed by means of
the stamp supplied as the tool.
46.5° 46.5°
6. When assembling the high-pressure pipe, A

C Stamp
screw the thrust bushings so high up on the 87° B
thread of the pressure pipe that the dis- Crease of
tance between the pipe end and the bottom 46.5°
edge of the thrust bushing is as stated in
GN909-14.3 204 05 L0a
Data.
A B C
Replace the O-rings.
From the B part
to conical shape
Before mounting a high-pressure pipe,
check the center distances between pipe 6.
ends and seats, and lubricate the threads
of the union nuts with molybdenum disul-
phide (MoS2).
It is of great importance for the mounting,

and a condition for obtaining tight joints,
that the pipes fit the seats accurately.
For reconditioning of seat in fuel valve, see

Procedure 909-11.3.
For reconditioning of seat in fuel pump top

cover, see Procedure 909-5.3.
GN909-14.3 204 06
C 4X-12525
909-14.4 Fuel Oil High-Pressure Pipe S60MC-C
Mounting
Mounting
909-14.4
4. 1. Check that the distance between the thrust

bushing and the pipe end is correct at both
ends of the pipe. See Procedure 909-14.3.
2. Ensure that the fuel valve is fitted with a

new O-ring. Lubricate the thread of the fuel
D-2 valve with a heat resistant grease.
3. Ensure that the union nipple at the fuel

pump end of the high-pressure pipe is fitted
with a new O-ring. Lubricate the thread on
the union nipple with a heat resistant
HN909-14.4 209 04 L0a
grease.
4. Mount the high-pressure pipe between the

fuel valve and the fuel pump.
Screw the union nipples onto the fuel valve

5. and into the fuel pump top cover, by hand.
Note!
The nipples must be screwed by hand, as

the threads of the union nipples, fuel
valve or fuel pump top cover might other-
wise be damaged.
Tightening with a crowfoot wrench should

only be done after both of the union nip-
ples have been screwed into position.
D-3
HN909-14.4 209 05
5. Use a crowfoot wrench and a tightening

spanner to tighten the union nipple at the
fuel valve to the torque stated in Data.
6.
Screw the union nut onto the union nipple
by hand, and tighten lightly with a hook
spanner.
6. Use a crowfoot wrench and a tightening

spanner to tighten the union nipple at the
fuel pump to the torque stated in Data.
Screw the union nut onto the union nipple

by hand, and tighten lightly with a hook
spanner.
HN909-14.4 209 06 L0a
D-3 7. If dismantled, re-mount the return oil pipe

on the fuel valve. Open the fuel oil inlet and
outlet valves.
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Roller Guide 109-15
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
0004
109-15 Fuel Pump Roller Guide
X Engage turning gear (while engine being truned)
Shut off cooling water May cause spring under tension
X Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Pump base 113 kg
D-2 Fuel pump roller guide 105 kg
D-3 Roller/bushing/shaft pin

- max. clearance 0.5 mm
D-4 Nut, reversing shaft

C 4X-12525
109-15 Fuel Pump Roller Guide S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Roller Guide 909-15.1
Checking
Fuel Pump Roller Guide
S60MC-C
0206
Checking
909-15.1
3.
Roller guide mounted in engine
1. The fuel pump roller guide can be partially

checked while mounted on the engine, us-
ing the following procedure:
2. Lift the fuel pump roller guide.

3. Remove the cover on the camshaft housing

to inspect the fuel pump roller guide.
Turn the engine to provide the maximum
HN909-10.1 205 01
space between the roller guide and the cam
disc.
Turn the roller by hand to check that it can

move freely and without unnecessary resis-
tance or “hard” points. 5.
Also inspect the surface of the roller for

possible damage marks, seizures or
scratches. Make sure that there are no trac-
es of bearing metal left in the roller guide
housing.
Check the clearance in the slide bearing by

lifting the roller relative to the roller guide
and measuring the difference in distance
between the cam disc and the roller in the
upper and lower positions of the roller.
4. Lower the roller guide onto the fuel cam

again.
5. Using the telegraph, move the roller guide

to the AHEAD position.
Check that the reversing link is fully tilted

GN909-15.1 203 05
over in AHEAD position.
Carry out the same check in the ASTERN po-

sition.
C 4X-12525
909-15.1 Fuel Pump Roller Guide S60MC-C
Checking
7. Roller guide removed from engine
A more suitable and reliable method is to check

the roller guide and the bearing clearance after
the roller guide has been dismounted:
D-2
6. Dismount the roller guide from the engine.
7. Check the surface of the roller and the slid-

ing surfaces of the roller guide, and meas-
ure any ovalness.
8. Turn the roller guide upside down and land

it in a vertical position on a couple of
planks, with the roller hanging freely.
Measure the clearance in the slide bearing

by placing a dial gauge against the roller
and lifting the roller as much as the clear-
ance permits.
MA909-8.0 70 07
8.
D-3
MA909-8.0 70 06
C 4X-12525
Checking
Measuring method for the clearance be- 9.

tween the guideway and the pin of reversing
L1 / L2
arm, without dismantling the fuel pump.
9. Shift the roller guide to AHEAD position,

keeping AHEAD signal air on the reversing
air cylinder. Measure distance L1 at revers-
A
ing rod end.
(B)
Blow off the air from the reversing air cylin-
der. Remove the flange cover.
L2 is to be measured after the rod of air cyl-

inder is moved to the camshaft side manu-
ally. By above measurement the clearance
between the guideway and the pin of re-
versing arm is caluculated as;
A = (L1 - L2) mm
(B = 6 - A) mm
(Dimension on the drawing A + B = 6 mm)

9f1206M09
10. Roller guide is to be shifted to ASTERN di-

rection. Measure L3 same as above method
with ASTERN signal on.
10.
L3 / L4
Blow off the air from the reversing air cylin-

der and shift the air cylinder rod manually
to exhaust side.
Measure L4 then;
B = (L3 - L4) mm
(A = 6 - B) mm
(A)
B
9f1206M10
C 4X-12525
Dismantling
Dismantling
909-15.2
1.
Note!

1. Dismantle the top cover/barrel assembly

from the fuel pump.
2. Dismantle the fuel pump housing.

Note!
When lifting the fuel pump housing, take

care not to damage the threads on the
studs.
GN909-5.2 205 05
2.
EN909-15.2 205 02
C 4X-12525
Dismantling
3. Loosen and remove the screws from the 3.

seal cap on top of the roller guide inside the
pump base.
Remove the seal cap from the roller guide/

pump base.
Dismantle the lubricating oil pipe and the

drain pipe from the pump base.
4. Remove the cover on the camshaft housing

to inspect the position of the roller guide.
Turn the engine until the roller guide is at
HN909-15.2 206 04
BDC.
HN909-10.1 205 01 4.
C 4X-12525
Dismantling
5. 5. Loosen the nuts on the two threaded studs

successively until the roller guide springs
are relieved.
Remove the nuts, mount two eye bolts in

D-1 the pump base and lift it away.
When lifting, take care that the bushing of

the pump base slides against the neck of
the roller guide without scratching.
Remove the springs from the roller guide.
6. Mount the roller guide lifting tool as follows:
• Lift the lock plate of the tool up on the

shaft of the tool.
• Position the tool so that its foot rests on

the thrust piece in the bayonet joint of the
roller guide.
HN909-15.2 206 06

• Lower the lock plate, thereby securing

the foot in the locked position.
6.
Lift the roller guide out of the roller guide
housing, using the crane.
When lifting, take care that the slide surfac-

es of the roller guide do not scrape against
the roller guide bushing.
D-2 Land the roller guide on wooden planks.
7. Check the roller guide.

HN909-15.2 206 07
C 4X-12525
Dismantling
Dismantling reversing air cylinder 8. E
As the fuel inlet main pipe is situated in front of

the reversing air cylinder, there is no space for
overhauling the air cylinder itself. Exhaust
It is necessary to disconnect at contact surface side
between the flange (box) and fuel pump base
plate as follows, instead of disconnecting the
air cylinder and flange (box).
A: In case reversing cylinder is damaged

Ahead
position.
Case 1: Revesing arm remains at AHEAD po-
sition
8. Dismantling the fuel pump is not necessary.

Loosen and dismantled the nut E. Pull the
rod of air cylinder manually towards cam- D
shaft side until the nut D comes inside the
flange (box). D-4
Camshaft
Loosen the nut D and turn the air cylinder side
rod or reversing rod to disconnect them.
9f2206M08
9. Shift the reversing rod to exhaust side. Dis-

connect the flange (box) at fuel pump base
plate.
9.
Contact surface
9f2206M09
C 4X-12525
Dismantling
10. Case 2: Revesing arm remains at Astern po-

sition
10. Dismantle the fuel pump and fuel roller

guide.
See Procedure 909-15.2. step 4-7.
Loosen the nut D and turn the air cylinder
rod or reversing rod to disconnect them.
11. Shift the reversing rod to AHEAD position

(exhaust side). Disconnect the flange (box)
at fuel pump base plate.
Astern
position.
D-4
9f2206M10
11.
Ahead
position.
Reversing
rod
Contact surface
9f2206M11
C 4X-12525
Dismantling
B: In case reversing cylinder is active 12.
12. Dismantling the fuel pump is not necessary,

Turn the engine to TDC of the concerned
cylinder. Order telegraph signal ASTERN
(FO handle stop position). Then reversing Reversing
air signal is led to the air cylinder so that rod
fuel roller guide is shifted to ASTERN posi-
tion.
Loosen the nut D and turn the air cylinder
rod to disconnect the rod.
13. Set the nut D on the rod end of reversing Astern

air cylinder. Shift the roller guide to AHEAD position.
position by means of the telegraph as
above.
D
Caution! D-4
Be careful not to damage the rod end
thread.
9f2206M12
Give ASTERN telegraph signal and shift the

air cylinder rod to ASTERN position. Discon-
nect the flange (box) from the fuel pump
base at the mating surface. 13. E
Exhaust
Caution!
side
Be careful as the rod moves when
ASTERN or AHEAD signal is given. Ahead
position.
Contact surface
D
Camshaft
side
9f2206M13
C 4X-12525
Overhaul
Overhaul
909-15.3
1. 1. Inspect and check the fuel pump roller

guide.
D-2 2. It is recommended that the roller guide

should only be dismantled if
• irregularities when turning the roller,
• damage to the roller,
• larger clearance than stated on the Data

sheet,
• seizure marks on the slide surfaces,
have been observed when checking the

roller guide.
Note!
MA909-8.0 70 07
For disassembling of the roller guide,

contact an MITSUI ENGINEERING &
SHIPBUILDING CO., LTD.
3. 3. If no irregularities are found, just clean and

lubricate the roller guide before remounting
it in the roller guide bushing.
D-2
HN909-15.3 206 03
C 4X-12525
Mounting
Mounting
909-15.4
1. Lubricate the roller guide with plenty of 1.

camshaft lubricating oil, and mount it in the
roller guide bushing, using the lifting tool.
During mounting, take care not to scratch

the sliding surfaces of the roller guide.
D-2
Make sure that the pin of the reversing link
fits in the bracket of the reversing shaft.
2. After mounting the roller guide with the re-

versing, link, check the clearance between
the roller guide and the guide plate mount-
ed in the roller guide bushing.
Turn the camshaft so that the roller guide

is lifted approx. 20 mm.
The clearance C between the roller guide

and the guide plate must be the same at
both ends ± 0.1 mm.
HN909-15.4 206 01
The clearances A and B between the

guideway and the pin of the reversing link
(arm) must be checked in the AHEAD and
ASTERN positions.
Connect working air to the air cylinder, and 2.

check that the reversing mechanism is
working smoothly.
The clearances A and B must be approx.

the same in both positions. Neither A nor B
must be less than 0.2 mm.
HN909-15.4 206 02
C 4X-12525
Mounting
3. 3. If adjustment is necessary, it must take

place in the ASTERN position.
Remove the cover over the shaft connec-

tion.
Loosen the nut on the reversing shaft and

carry out the adjustment.
After adjustment, shift to AHEAD position

and check the clearances A and B once
more.
Finally, shift again to ASTERN.
D-4 Tighten the nut on the reversing shaft to the

torque stated in Data, and lock the nut with
Loctite type: Screw Lock No. 59.
Mount the cover over the shaft connection.
4. Turn the engine until the roller guide is at

HN909-15.4 206 03
BDC.
5. Mount the springs and the spring seat discs

over the roller guide.
5. Mount the pump base over the roller guide

and the springs.
Mount the two special nuts on the threaded

studs.
D-1
Using the special tube-shaped socket
wrench, tighten the nuts until the pump
base is fastened tightly to the roller guide
bushing.
HN909-15.2 206 06
C 4X-12525
Mounting
6. Check the movement of the reversing link. 6.

7. Replace the scraper rings in the seal cap as

follows:
Loosen and remove the screws and nuts

from the bottom of the cap, remove the re-
taining flange and ring holder with scraper
ring.
8. Replace the O-ring in the top of the cap.
GN909-15.1 203 05
Replace the axial scraper ring in the bottom
of the cap. Check that the O-ring and scrap-
er ring are mounted correctly. See the
sketch.
GN909-15.4 203 07 7.
8.
MA909-8.0 70 21
C 4X-12525
Mounting
9. 9. Remove the scraper ring and O-ring from

the ring holder.
Place the new O-ring in the ring holder.
Before mounting, the new scraper ring must

be heated in 100°C hot water or oil for at
least five minutes.
Note!
When mounting the scraper ring in the

GN909-15.4 203 09
groove, fold the ring without making any

sharp edges, and be careful not to cut
the scraper ring on the edge of the ring
groove when pressing it in.
10.
Check that the O-ring and scraper ring are
mounted correctly. See the sketch.
10. Assemble the seal cap, the ring holder and

retaining flange.
Tighten the nuts on the screws.
After tightening, check that the holder can

be moved.
11. Mount the lubricating oil pipe and the drain

pipe on the pump base.
GN909-15.4 203 10
Mount the seal cap on top of the roller

guide, over the seal bush inside the pump
base.
11.
Caution!
Be careful not to damage the seal, when

mounting the seal cap.
Otherwise the fuel oil might enter in the
camcase.
Tighten the screws and lock with locking

wire.
12. Mount the fuel pump housing.

HN909-15.4 206 11
Mount the top cover.

C 4X-12525
Mounting
Mounting of reversing air cylinder 13. E
13. Loosen and dismantle the nut E. Shift the

Exhaust
reversing rod to camshaft side manually.
side
Connect it with rod of reversing air cylinder
by the nut D. By means of the telegraph,
move the air cylinder to AHEAD position. Ahead
Tighten the nut E (tightening torque 80 position.
Nm).
By means of the telegraph, move the air
cylinder to ASTERN position. Adjust the
clearance of the link. Finally, tighten the nut
D (see Data D-4).
Contact surface
D
Camshaft
side
9f2206M13
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Valve and Fuel Pump Panel Plate 90951-0432M
C 4X-12525
Plate 90951-0432M Fuel Valve and Fuel Pump Panel S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
010 Panel for tool *) (P909)
045 Measuring tool 09B71
057 Lifting tool for fuel pump barrel 09B12
069 Lifting tool for fuel pump top cover 09B14
070 Lifting tool for fuel pump housing 09B11
116 Crowfoot spanner, 50mm 09D83
130 Crowfoot spanner, 85mm 09B87
153 Flange for dismantling of non-return valve 09A56
165 Grinding mandrel for valve head 09A23
177 Grinding mandrel for two spindle 09A27
189 Grinding mandrel for holder-outside 09A25
190 Grinding mandrel for holder-inside 09A26
200 dismantling screw 09B20
236 Pin wrench 09B84
248 Hook wrench 09D81
250 Drift for spindle guide 09A58
297 Assembling tool 09A52
307 Hook wrench 09A81
319 Hexagon socket wrench 09A58
*) Optional extras
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Valve - Tools Plate 90961-0060Md
When referring to this page, please quote Plate P90961 Edition 0060Md Page 3 (10)
C 4X-12525
Plate 90961-0060Md Fuel Valve - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
014 Test rig, complete 09A71
026 Rig fuel oil valve 09A71
038 High-pressure hose 09A71
051 Table 09A71
134 Test rig, guide,M42x2 09A71
158 Connecting piece 09A71
M1 Grinding tool for seat for fuel oil pipe 09A31
M2 Grinding tool for fuel oil pipe 09D31
M3 Socket for thrust piece 09D85
M4 Drift for non - return valve 09A55
M5 Pulley with chain for lifting device 09C52
M6 Tightening gauge for fuel pump housing 09C71
Page 4 (10) When referring to this page, please quote Plate P90961 Edition 0060Md
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Pump Seals - Mounting Tools Plate 90962-0058M
C 4X-12525
Plate 90962-0058M Fuel Pump Seals - Mounting Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
021 Sizer 09B51
033 Pusher 09B51
045 Cone / Sizer 09B51
057 Cone 09B51
069 Pusher 09B51
M1 Cone 09B51
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Valve - Tools Plate 90963-0006M
C 4X-12525
Plate 90963-0006M Fuel Valve - Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
015 Pulling tool for nozzle 09A54
027 Tool box 09A54
039 Mounting tool for nozzle and spindle guide 09A54
040 Tool for mini - sac valve, complete 09A54
M1 Cleaning tool for atmizer 09A54
M2 Cleaning brush 09A54
C 4X-12525
S60MC-C Fuel Valve - Inspection Tools Plate 90968-0001M
C 4X-12525
Plate 90968-0001M Fuel Valve - Inspection Tools S60MC-C
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
012 Probe light with magnifier, complete *) (09A75)
*) Optional extra
C 4X-12525
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C Air Cooler Element (T/C:AFT) 110-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
02
110-1 Air Cooler Element (T/C:AFT)
X Stopped engine Entrance into the scavenge air box

prohibited before cleaning
Do not enter area when over head
X Shut off starting air supply lifting is being carried out
Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Weight of air cooler element

See Vol. 4
4E-92648
110-1 Air Cooler Element (T/C:AFT) S60MC-C
Data
4E-92648
S60MC-C Air Cooler Element (T/C:AFT) 910-1.1
Checking
Air Cooler Element (T/C:AFT)
S60MC-C
203
Checking
910-1.1
1.
1. For the day-to-day checking of the
scavenge air cooler, measure the drop in
pressure and temperature of the scavenge
air across the cooler during operation of the
engine.
Compare these measurements with the

testbed data. For further evaluation of the
measurements, see instruction book
Volume 1, Chapter 706.
2. An increase in the air pressure drop across
GN910-1.1 203Ma 01 A0b

the scavenge air cooler indicates fouling of
the air side of the cooler.
A decrease in the air temperature drop

across the scavenge air cooler indicates
fouling of the water side of the cooler.
4.
3. If the measurements indicate fouling of the
air cooler, it is recommended to inspect the
air cooler elements as follows:
4. Remove the top cover of the air cooler.
5. Visually inspect the air cooler elements

through the opening.
If the elements are fouled, clean the ele-

ments.
GN910-1.1 203Ma 04 A0b

5.
GN910-1.1 203Ma 05 A0b
4E-92648
910-1.2 Air Cooler Element (T/C:AFT) S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
910-1.2
3. 1. Close the cooling water inlet and outlet

valves of the air cooler.
Drain off the cooling water by opening the

D drain cooks.
2. Remove the screws connecting the cooler

inlet and outlet pipes to the air cooler ele-
ment.
3. Mount the lifting attachment to the flange of

the end cover and hook the three(3) tackls
GN910-1.2 203Ma 03 A0a
(A, B and D).
Remove the screws which fasten the cooler

element to the cooler housing.
Set the dismantling screws to the outermost

4. tube plate.
Pull the cooler element from the cooler
housing using the dismantling screws.
(The pair of wheels fixed at the innermost
end of the cooler element is being placed
D on the rails arranged on the cooler hous-
ing.)
4. Strech the tackle A strongly, and lift up the

front side of the cooler element about 2 ∼ 3
mm.
Pull the cooler element one-third way out of
GN910-1.2 203Ma 04 A0a
the cooler housing by the tackle B.
Note!
During the pulling out work of the cooler

element, it is necessary to use a rope D
5. in order to prevent the excessive move-
ment of the cooler element by the inertia
force.
Mount the support on the cooler housing.

D
5. Shift the tackle A from the lifting attachment
to the cooler element fore lifting point and
suspenend it by means of the tackle A.
Shift the position of hook of the tackle of the

lifting attachment.
GN910-1.2 203Ma 05 A0a
Hook the tackle C to the lifting attachment.
Pull the cooler element two-third way out of

the cooler housing.
4E-92648
Dismantling
6. Shift the tackle A from the cooler element 6.

fore lifting point to after lifting point.
Pull the cooler element out of the cooler

housing completely, using the tackles A, B
and C. D
GN910-1.2 203Ma 06 A0a
4E-92648
Overhaul
Overhaul
910-1.3
1. 1. The air side of the cooler is cleanded by in-

jecting a chemical fluid through the spray
pipe arrangement fitted to the air chamber
above the cooler element.
2. It is recommended to use one of the follow-

ing cleaning fluids, or a similar product.
D 1) Product: ACC 9, produced by

Drew Chemical Corp., New York, USA
2) Product: 80 B, produced by
Vecom Int., Massluis, Holland.
3) Product: NEOS-one-1, produced

by NEOS CO., Ltd., Tokyo,Japan
3. Cleaning should be carried out in the fol-

lowing sequence:
1) Do not start cleaning until the engine has

been at a standstill for about 30 minutes.
Do not disconnect the compressed air
supply to the exhaust valve.
Sight glass
H A 2) Follow the detailed cleaning instructions

To bilge displayed at the cleaning pipe on the
G engine.
To ensure satisfactory spraying of the
E cleaning fluid, the circulating pump pres-
C sure must be at least 0.07 MPa(0.7 bar).
F.W.
(From hydrophor)
Re-circulation 3) Continue the cleaning process for at
F least 30 minutes. The time required
depends on the frequency with which
cleaning is carried out and the chemical
Filtar
product used.
B 4) After cleaning, flush the cooler with clean

Sludge pump suction
Circulating pump water until the water appearing in the
Cleaning condition Normel running condition sight glasses is clean and pure.
GN910-1.3 203Ma 01 A0b
1) Chemical cleaning 3) Open : A

Open : B,C,D,E,F Close : B,C,E,F,G,H
Close : A,G,H Close the inspection cover on 5) Inspection is carried out either by remov-
Start the pump the scavenge air receiver
ing the cover on top of the cooler or by
Water flushing dismantling the charging air pipe.
2) Open : A,D,G,H
Close : B,C,E,F
4E-92648
Overhaul
4. Clean the water side of the cooler can be 4.

done with the end cover of the cooler re-
moved.
Close the cooling water inlet and outlet

valves.
drain cook.
Access to the covers on the waterflow re-

versing chamber is throgh covers on the
cooler housing.
GN910-1.3 203Ma 04 A0b

The end cover of the cooler is to be disman-
tled.
5. Clean the inside of the tubes by means of

the supplied cleaning brush, mounted on a
drilling machine. 5.
In the event of a leaking tube, plug both

ends of the tube using a brass or copper
plug.
In the event of leakage between a tube and

the tube plate, roll the tube using the tube
expander.
GN910-1.3 203Ma 05 A0b
4E-92648
Mounting
Mounting
910-1.4
1. 1. The cooler element has been pushed in the

cooler housing, using the tackles A, B and
C.
Shift the tackle A from the cooler element

after lifting point for fore lifting point.
2. When the cooler element has been pushed

halfway in the cooler housing, remove the
tackle C.
Shift the position of hook of the tackle of the

GN910-1.4 203Ma 01 A0a
lifting attachment.
Shift the tackle A from the cooler element

fore lifting point to the lifting attachment
and suspend it by means of the tackle A.
2. Hook the tackle D to the lifting attachment.
3. Dismantling the support on the cooler hous-

ing.
The cooler element has been pushed in the

cooler housing, using the tackles A, B and
D.
Remove the tackles A, B and D.
Dismantling the lifting attachment from

GN910-1.4 203Ma 02 A0a
flange of the end cover.
3.
GN910-1.4 203Ma 03 A0a
4E-92648
Mounting
4. Mount the screw for securing the cooler el- 4.

ement to the air cooler housing.
5. Mount the cooler inlet and outlet pipes on

the air cooler element, and connect all the
drain pipes.
6. Fully open the cooling water inlet and outlet

Close the drain cock.
GN910-1.4 203Ma 04 A0a
4E-92648
S60MC-C Air Cooler Element (T/C:REAR) 110-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
07
110-1 Air Cooler Element (T/C:REAR)
X Stopped engine Entrance into the scavenge box

prohibited before ventilating
Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Weight of air cooler element

See Vol. 4
4E-92648
110-1 Air Cooler Element (T/C:REAR) S60MC-C
Data
4E-92648
S60MC-C Air Cooler Element (T/C:REAR) 910-1.1
Checking
Air Cooler Element (T/C:REAR)
S60MC-C
210
Checking
910-1.1
1.
1. For the day-to-day checking of the
scavenge air cooler, measure the drop in
pressure and temperature of the scavenge
air across the cooler during operation of the
engine.
Compare these measurements with the

testbed data. For further evaluation of the
measurements, see instruction book
Volume I, Chapter 706.
JN910-1.1 210M 01 A0a R

2. An increase in the air pressure drop across
the scavenge air cooler indicates fouling of
the air side of the cooler.
A decrease in the air temperature drop

across the scavenge air cooler indicates
fouling of the water side of the cooler.
4.
3. If the measurements indicate fouling of the
air cooler, it is recommended to inspect the
air cooler elements as follows:
4. Remove the top cover of the air cooler.
5. Visually inspect the air cooler elements

through the opening.
If the elements are fouled, dismantle and

clean the elements.
HN910-1.1 210M 04 A0a R

5.
JN910-1.1 210M 05 A0a R
4E-92648
910-1.2 Air Cooler Element (T/C:REAR) S60MC-C
Dismantling
Dismantling
910-1.2
3. 1. Close the cooling water inlet and outlet


drain cocks.
2. Remove the screws connecting the cooler

inlet and outlet pipes to the air cooler ele-
ment.
Disconnect the drain pipes from the air

cooler.
GN910-1.2 210M 03 A0a R
3. Remove the sealing flange and sealing ring

from cooler housing.
Remove the nuts which fasten the cooler

element to the cooler housing.
4.
Press the cooler element free, using dis-
mantling screws.
4. Mount the lifting attachment to the air cool-

er.
Mount atrolley and hook the tackles.
Note!
GN910-1.2 210M 04 A0a R
During the pulling out work of the cooler

Wheel
element, it is necessary to use another
rope in order to provent the excessive
movement of the cooler element by the
inertia force.
Lift and pull the cooler element halfway out

of the cooler housing by the tackles.
Mount the two rails on which the inner most

pair of wheels can ran.
Mount a wire rope to the cooler element

body. Remove the tackle from the lifting at-
tachment and hook it to the wire rope.
4E-92648
Dismantling
5. Pull the cooler element out of the cooler 5.

housing completely.
Mount a wire rope to the cooler element

body, and hook to the tackle.
Before lowering the cooler element to the

floor, remove the bracket under the cooler
element.
GN910-1.2 210M 05 A0a R

D-1
4E-92648
Overhaul
Overhaul
910-1.3
1. 1. The air side of the cooler is cleaned by in-

jecting a chemical fluid through the spray
pipe arrangement fitted to the air chamber
above the cooler element.
2. It is recommended to use one of the follow-

ing cleaning fluids, or a similar product.
D
1) Product: ACC 9, produced by
Drew Chemical Corp., New York, USA
2) Product: 80 B, produced by
Vecom Int., Maassluis, Holland.
3) Product: NEOS-one-1, produced

by NEOS CO., Ltd., Tokyo,Japan
3. Cleaning should be carried out in the fol-

lowing sequence:
Sight glass 1) Do not start cleaning until the engine has

H A been at a standstill for about 30 minutes.
To bilge
G Do not disconnect the compressed air
supply to the exhaust valve.
F.W. C E
(From hydrophor) 2) Follow the detailed cleaning instructions
Re-circulation displayed at the cleaning pipe on the
F engine.
To ensure satisfactory spraying of the
Filtar cleaning fluid, the circulating pump pres-
sure must be at least 0.07 MPa(0.7 bar).
B
Circulating pump Sludge pump suction
3) Continue the cleaning process for at
least 30 minutes. The time required
depends on the frequency with which
Cleaning condition Normel running condition cleaning is carried out and the chemical
1) Chemical cleaning 3) Open : A
product used.
GN910-1.3 210M 01 A0a R
Open : B,C,D,E,F Close : B,C,E,F,G,H

Close : A,G,H Close the inspection cover on
Start the pump the scavenge air receiver
4) After cleaning, flush the cooler with clean
Water flushing water until the water appearing in the
2) Open : A,D,G,H
Close : B,C,E,F
sight glasses is clean and pure.
5) Inspection is carried out either by remov-

ing the cover on top of the cooler or by
dismantling the charging air pipe.
4E-92648
Overhaul
4. Cleaning the outside of the cooler can be 4.

done with the water chamber removed.
Close the cooling water inlet and outlet

valves.
drain cock.
Loosen and remove the screw in the water

chamber and dismount the water chamber.
5. Clean the inside of the tubes by means of
GN910-1.3 210M 04 A0a R

the supplied cleaning brush, mounted on a
drilling machine.
In the event of a leaking tube, plug both

ends of the tube using a brass or copper
plug.
5.
In the event of leakage between a tube and
the tube plate, roll the tube using the tube
expander.
GN910-1.3 210M 05 A0a R
4E-92648
Mounting
Mounting
910-1.4
1. 1. Mount a wire rope to the cooler element

body, and hook to the tackle.
Lifting the cooler element from the floor.
Mount the bracket under the cooler ele-

ment.
2. Put the cooler element on the two rails.
3. Push the cooler element halfway in the

cooler housing by the tackles.
GN910-1.4 210M 01 A0a R
D-1 4. Remove the two rails from the cooler hous-

ing.
Push the cooler element in the cooler hous-

ing.
2. Remove the lifting attachment to the air

3. cooler.
4.
GN910-1.2 210M 04 A0a R
Wheel
4E-92648
Mounting
5. Mount the searing flange and sealing ring 5.

to cooler housing. 6.
6. Tightening nut for fasten the cooler element

to the cooler housing.
7. Mount the cooler inlet and outlet pipes on

the air cooler element, and connect all the
drain pipes.
8. Fully open the cooling water inlet and outlet

GN910-1.4 210M 05 A0a R

Close the drain cock.
4E-92648
MC Non-Return Valve (T/C:AFT) 110-2
Data
Special Data
MC
02
110-2 Non-Return Valve (T/C:AFT)

Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
4E-92648
110-2 Non-Return Valve (T/C:AFT) MC
Data
4E-92648
S60MC-C Non-Return Valve (T/C:AFT) 910-2.3
Overhaul
Non-Return Valve (T/C:AFT)
S60MC-C
203
Overhaul
910-2.3
1.
This procedure includes both the main non-
return valve and the non-return valve for the
auxiliary blowers.
Both sets of non-return valves are accessed via

the scavenge air receiver.
Note!
Access to the scavenge air receiver must

not be attempted until the air in the
receiver is clean.
Main Non-Return Valve
1. Remove the two outermost and middle nuts

(which fasten the valve assembly to the
housig). Lift the complete valve assembly
out of the air receiver.
GN910-2.3 203Ma 01 A0a
2. Knock out the spring pin which secures the

axle and the valve flap to the support and
press out the axle. Now the valve flap is
free and can be replaced.
3. For further dismantling, remove the two

2.
screws which hold the supports and the
clamp together as an assembly.
4. When mounting, secure the axle and the

valve flap to the support by means of the
spring pin.
Finally, mount the complete non-return

MC910-6.0 26 02 L0a
valve in the inlet casing.
3.
MC910-6.0 26 03 L0a
4E-92648
910-2.3 Non-Return Valve (T/C:AFT) S60MC-C
Overhaul
5. Non-Return Valve for Auxiliary Blowers
Replacement of non-return valve assembly:
5. Loosen and remove the screws from the

guard around the valves from the bottom of
the air receiver. Then remove the guard.
Remove the two outermost screws and the

middle screw (which fasten the valve as-
sembly to the housing). Lift the complete
valve assembly out and mount a new as-
GN910-2.3 203Ma 05 A0a
sembly instead.
Overhaul of non-return valve assembly:
6. Knock out the spring pin which secures the

axle of the valve flap and press out the ax-
6. le. Now the valve flap is free and can be re-
placed. For further dismantling, remove the
two screws which hold the parts together as
an assembly.
When mounting, again secure the axle of

the valve flap by means of the spring pin.
Finally, mount the guard around the valves.

GN910-2.3 203Ma 06 A0a
4E-92648
MC Non-Return Valve (T/C:REAR) 110-2
Data
Special Data
MC
02
110-2 Non-Return Valve (T/C:REAR)
X Stopped engine Entrance into the scavenge box

Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
4E-92648
110-2 Non-Return Valve (T/C:REAR) MC
Data
4E-92648
S60-70MC-C Non-Return Valve (T/C:REAR) 910-2.3
Overhaul
Non-Return Valve (T/C:REAR)
S60-70MC-C
207
Overhaul
910-2.3
1.
Access to the non-return valves in the scav-
enge air receiver takes place - after the engine
has been stopped - through the inspection
openings of the receiver.
Note!

receiver is clean.
Main Non-Return Valve
1. Inside the scavenge air cooler housing,

remove the two outermost screws of the
valve that is to be overhauled.
Remove the valve from the engine.
2. Remove the spring pin from the valve shaft

HN910-2.3 207 05 L0a
and knock the valve shaft out of the valve

flap.
Clean the valve shaft and the slide bearings

inside the valve flaps. Lubricate the valve
shaft and the slide bearings with
2.
molybdenum disulphide (MoS2).
3. For further dismantling, remove the two

screws which hold the supports and the
clamp together as an assembly.
After the overhaul, it must be possible to

move the valve flap by the light touch of a
MC910-6.0 26 02 L0a
finger.
4. Assemble the valve and re-mount it in the

scavenge air cooler housing.
3.
MC910-6.0 26 03 L0a
4E-92648
S60MC-C Auxiliary Blower (T/C:AFT) 110-3
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
02
110-3 Auxiliary Blower (T/C:AFT)
X Stopped engine Risk of electric shock
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
2000 kg
D-1 Weight of blower unit, up til

complete *) 1530 kg
*) Depending on electric
motor type and number of
cylinders of engine (size and
capacity of auxiliary blower)
4E-92648
110-3 Auxiliary Blower (T/C:AFT) S60MC-C
Data
4E-92648
S60-70MC-C Auxiliary Blower (T/C:AFT) 910-3.3
Overhaul
Auxiliary Blower (T/C:AFT)
S60-70MC-C
207
Overhaul
910-3.3
1.
1. When cleaning and inspecting the auxiliary
blower, disengage, the cable connections
to the blower motors.
Wire ropes with shackle as well as two

tackles suspended from mountings on the
gallery bracket are to be hooked on to the
blower flange, before removing the screw in
the flange.
2. The end cover complete with blower can
GN910-3.3 207Ma 01 A0a

now be pulled free of the suction pipe by
means of the two tackles.
While pulling out the end cover with the

blower assembly, make sure that the blow-
er housing disengages from the air pipe
without deforming it.
2.
Then inspect and clean the blower wheel as
well as the blower housing.
For overhaul of blower wheel and bearings,

see blower manufacture’s instructions.
GN910-3.3 207Ma 02 A0a
4E-92648
S60-70MC-C Auxiliary Blower (T/C:REAR) 110-3
Data
Special Data
S60-70MC-C
05
110-3 Auxiliary Blower (T/C:REAR)

Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
1500 kg
D-1 Weight of blower unit,

complete *) up to 1350 kg
*) Depending on electric
motor type and number of
cylinders of engine (size and
capacity of auxiliary blower)
4E-92648
110-3 Auxiliary Blower (T/C:REAR) S60-70MC-C
Data
4E-92648
S60-70MC-C Auxiliary Blower (T/C:REAR) 910-3.3
Overhaul
Auxiliary Blower (T/C:REAR)
S60-70MC-C
207
Overhaul
910-3.3
1.
1. Disconnect the cable connections to the
blower motors.
Wire ropes with shackle as well as two

tackles suspended from mountings on the
gallery bracket are to be hooked on to the
blower flange, before removing the screw in
the flange.
2. The end cover complete with blower can

now be pulled free of the suction pipe by
GN910-3.3 203M 01 A0a R

means of the two tackles.
GN910-3.3 203M 02 A0a R 2.
4E-92648
S60MC-C Water Mist Catcher (T/C:AFT) 110-6
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
02
110-6 Water Mist Catcher (T/C:AFT)

prohibited before cleaning
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Water mist catcher 240 kg
4E-92648
110-6 Water Mist Catcher (T/C:AFT) S60MC-C
Data
4E-92648
S60MC-C Water Mist Catcher (T/C:AFT) 910-6.2
Dismantling
Water Mist Catcher (T/C:AFT)
S60MC-C
201
Dismantling
910-6.2
2.
1. Normally it is not necessary to remove the
water mist catcher element from the
scavenge air cooler housing. If, however,
the water mist catcher elements have
fouled or are damaged, they must be
dismantled for cleaning or repair.
2. Access to the water mist catcher elment is

via the scavenge air receiver.
Note!
GN910-6.2 201Ma 02 A0b

receiver is cream.
Dismount the small cover in the air cooler

housing and mount the eye screws on the 3.
top of the water mist catcher element.
Suspend two tackles from the lifting brack-

ets. Hook the tackles on the eye bolt in the
water mist catcher element and haul the
tackles tight.
3. Dismount the both side small cover of the

air cooler housing.
Remove the fastening screw for the water

GN910-6.2 201Ma 03 A0b
mist catcher element.
4. Remove the screw for bottom cover of the

air cooler housing and open the cover.
Slacken off on the tackle above the water

mist catcher element to lower the water
mist catcher element. 4.
Land the water mist catcher element on a

wooden plank.
GN910-6.2 201Ma 04 A0b
4E-92648
910-6.4 Water Mist Catcher (T/C:AFT) S60MC-C
Mounting
Mounting
910-6.4
1. 1. Lift the water mist catcher elements into the

scavenge air cooler housing.
Note!
Make sure to mount the elements in the

same position as before dismantling.
Check with the marking on the element.
2. After mounting, tighten the element to the

GN910-6.4 201Ma 01 A0b
air cooler frame.

Air flow
Mount the both side small cover of the air
cooler housing.
Close the bottom cover of air cooler hous-

2. ing and mount all the bottom cover screws.
3. Remove the two tackles in the air cooler

housing.
Remove the eye screws in the top of the

water mist catcher element.
Mount the small cover in the air cooler

housing.
GN910-6.4 201Ma 02 A0b
3.
GN910-6.4 201Ma 03 A0a
4E-92648
S60-70MC-C Water Mist Catcher (T/C:REAR) 110-6
Data

Special Data
S60-70MC-C
05
110-6 Water Mist Catcher (T/C:REAR)
X Stopped engine
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Water mist catcher 310 kg
4E-92648
110-6 Water Mist Catcher (T/C:REAR) S60-70MC-C
Data
4E-92648
S60-70MC-C Water Mist Catcher (T/C:REAR) 910-6.2
Dismantling
Water Mist Catcher (T/C:REAR)
S60-70MC-C
206
Dismantling
910-6.2
2.
1. Normally it is not necessary to remove the
water mist catcher elements from the
scavenge air cooler housing. If, however,
the water mist catcher elements have
fouled or are damaged, they must be
dismantled for cleaning or repair.
2. Remove the screws from the two covers,

one on each end of the air cooler frame.
Loosen the screws which fasten the water
GN910-6.2 201M 02 A0a R

mist element to the cooler frame, through
the small end cover.
3. Pull out the water mist element.
GN910-6.2 201M 03 A0a R 3.
4E-92648
910-6.4 Water Mist Catcher (T/C:REAR) S60-70MC-C
Mounting
Mounting
910-6.4
1. 1. Push the water mist catcher elements into

the scavenge air cooler housing.
Note!
Air flow Make sure to mount the element in the
same position as before dismantling.
Check with the marking on the element.
2. After mounting, tighten the element to the

GN910-6.4 201M 01 A0a R
air cooler frame.
Finally, mount the two covers on the cooler

frame.
2.
GN910-6.4 201M 02 A0a R
4E-92648
S60-70MC-C Butterfly Valve (T/C:REAR) 110-9
Data
Special Data
S60-70MC-C
02
110-9 Butterfly Valve (T/C:REAR)

Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
4E-92648
110-9 Butterfly Valve (T/C:REAR) S60-70MC-C
Data
4E-92648
S60-70MC-C Butterfly Valve (T/C:REAR) 910-9.1
Checking
Butterfly Valve (T/C:REAR)
S60-70MC-C
203
Checking
910-9.1
1.
1. It is important that the automatic non-return
valves (butterfly valves) always function
easily and unimpeded.
The movability of the valve flaps should

therefore be checked at suitable intervals.
The valve shall open for the air flow from
the valve housing to the auxiliary blower.
Access to the butterfly valves is made

through the manhole covers of the receiver
after the engine has stopped running and it
has been ascertained that the air in the re-
ceiver is pure.
Open the valve plate of the non-return

valve which has been fitted on the upper
face of the valve housing in the receiver by
means of a hand.
By inserting a hand from this opening, in-
spect the movability of the two valve flaps
for the butterfly valves.
GN910-9.1 000M 01 A0a R
The flaps shall move so easily that the fin-

ger up.
4E-92648
S60MC-C Air Cooler - Tools (AFT) Plate 91061-51Ma
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 91061 Edition 51Ma
C 4E-92648
Plate 91061-51Ma Air Cooler - Tools (AFT)
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.

M2 Support 10A54
C 4E-92648
S60MC-C Air Cooler - Tools (REAR) Plate 91061-51Ma
C 4E-92648
Plate 91061-51Ma Air Cooler - Tools (REAR)
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.

M1 Rail 10A52
C 4E-92648
S60MC-C Turbocharger System - Tools Plate 91061-34Ma
C 4E-92648
Plate 91061-34Ma Turbocharger System - Tools
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
171M Compensator extender (10B61)

183M Screw (10B61)
205M Nut (10B61)
217M Compensator extender, complete 10B61
C 4E-92648
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C Safety Valve 111-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
04
111-1 Safety Valve
Engage turning gear 40-280 Nm

Shut off fuel oil 3m

Data
D-1 Tightening torque for

valve housing 45 Nm
D-2 Opening pressure 20 MPa

(200 bar)
+/-0.5 MPa
(+/–5 bar)
4E-92649
111-1 Safety Valve S60MC-C
Data
4E-92649
MC-C Safety Valve 911-1.2
Dismantling
Safety Valve
MC-C
205
Dismantling
911-1.2
1.
1. Remove the guard surrouding the safety
valve.
2. Unscrew the safety valve from the exten-

sion pipe.
HM911-1.2 205 01 L0a

HM911-1.2 205 02 L0a 2.
4E-92649
911-1.3 Safety Valve MC-C
Overhaul (adjustment)
911-1.3
1. 1. If necessary, dismantle the safety valve and

clean all the parts in either gas oil, ker-
osene, or ‘electro-cleaner’.
2. Assemble the safety valve in two steps:
• Insert the valve flap and the stop ring in

the valve guide and screw on the valve
housing.
• Tighten the housing to D-1, loosen and

tighten again to D-1.
GN911-1.3 203 01
3. Then mount:
• the valve spindle
• the spring
2.
• the adjusting screw
• the lock nut
D-1
GN911-1.3 203 02
3.
GN911-1.3 203 03
4E-92649
MC-C Safety Valve 911-1.3
4. To set the safety valve opening pressure: 4.
• Set up the safety valve in the testing

device. D-2
• Connect the testing device to the hydrau-
lic pump.
• Loosen the lock nut on the safety valve.
• Turn the adjusting screw until the valve

just closes.
GN911-1.3 203 04
• Bleed the valve and hose until oil, with-
out air bubbles, flows out from the open-
ings of the safety valve.
• Tighten the adjusting screw of the safety

valve until the correct pressure is indi-
cated (see D-2).
• Tighten the lock nut.
• Test the opening pressure.
• Remove the valve from the testing

device.
4E-92649
911-1.4 Safety Valve MC-C
Mounting
Mounting
911-1.4
1. 1. Pierce the bore in the extension pipe, and

blow it clean.
Clean the seal ring grooves.
2. Mount a new or overhauled safety valve on

the extension pipe without a seal ring.
When mounting the safety valve on the ex-

tension pipe, apply tools only on the hexa-
gon on the safety valve.
Mount the extension pipe on the cylinder

HN911-1.4 205 01 L0a
cover with fitting a new seal ring between

both.
3. Mount the guard surrounding the safety

valve.
2.
HM911-1.2 205 02 L0a
3.
HM911-1.2 205 01 L0a
4E-92649
S60MC-C Relief Valve 111-2
Data

Special Data
S60MC-C
04
111-2 Relief Valve
X Stopped engine
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
4E-92649
111-2 Relief Valve S60MC-C
Data
4E-92649
MC-C Relief Valve 911-2.1
Checking
Relief Valve
MC-C
205
Checking
911-2.1
1.
1. Test the functioning of the relief valves on
the crankcase wall by means of the tool
supplied.
2. Screw the tool into the valve plate nut.
3. Turn the nut of the tool 20-25 revolutions to

open the valve.
4. Turn the nut back and remove the tool.
HM911-2.0 27 01
GN911-2.0 27 02 2.
3.
GN911-2.0 27 03
4E-92649
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C Holding Down and End Chock Bolts 112-1
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
02
112-1 Holding Down and End Chock Bolts
Stopped engine Risk of high pressure oil 1x3m

Block the starting mechanism Protectors to be worn 2 x 1.5 m
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data
D-1 Tightening pressure for

holding down bolts 150 MPa
(1500 bar)

end chock bolts 150 MPa
(1500 bar)
D-3 Increased tightening pressure

(only for initial tightening of
end chock bolts) 165 MPa
(1650 bar)
D-4 Check holding down bolts

and end chock bolts for
correct tightening after the
following service hours:
1st check 500 hours

2nd check 1000 hours
3rd check 2000 hours
4th check 4000 hours
Subsequently at
intervals of 8000 hours
Engine on Cast Iron supporting chocks
C 4X-30940
112-1 Holding Down and End Chock Bolts S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-30940
S60MC-C Holding Down and End Chock Bolts 912-1.1
Checking
Holding Down and End Chock Bolts
S60MC-C
203
Checking
912-1.1
Note!
The hydraulic jack used for tightening the

holding down bolts is marked with:
For: Holding down bolts
The larger jack used for tightening the

end chock bolts is marked with:
For: End chock bolts
Hydraulic tightening of holding down bolts and

end chock bolts is carried out as detailed in
Section 913-1. The normal tightening pressure
is indicated on the Data sheet and is also
stamped on the tightening tool.
For the initial tightening of the end chock bolts,

raise the pump pressure to the value indicated
on the Data sheet. Then tighten the nut firmly
and relieve the hydraulic tool completely of
pressure. After about two minutes, raise the
pressure again until the nut can be loosened.
Now adjust the pressure to the normal
tightening pressure indicated, tighten the nut
firmly, and relieve the system of pressure.
For the initial tightening of end chock bolts, the

following alternative procedure can be
followed:
Tighten the bolts to the increased pressures

stated on the Data sheet and leave the bolts so
tightened until after the sea trials, following
which they are to be retightened to the normal
value indicated on the Data sheet and on the
hydraulic tightening tool.
C 4X-30940
912-1.1 Holding Down and End Chock Bolts S60MC-C
Checking
1. Checking the Bolt Tightening
1. The holding down bolts and end chock bolts

must be checked for correct tightness at the
intervals indicated on the Data sheet.
Before checking the bolt tightening, check

the fitting of the supporting chocks as far as
conditions of access permit.
To check the bolt tightening, raise the

pressure on the hydraulic tool slowly while
constantly attempting to loosen the nut with
the tommy bar. The oil pressure indicated
on the pressure gauge when the nut comes
loose (‘loosening pressure’) is noted down
in the checking table, see drawing Nos.
782225-0 and 782226-2, following which
the bolts are tightened to the normal
tightening pressure.
The condition of the bolted joints, and thus

the general condition of the foundation, can
GN912-2.12 03 01
be effectively checked by comparing the

tables from successive bolt checks.
If the ‘loosening pressure' is below 80 per

cent of the tightening pressure, the correct
fitting of the relative chocks shall always be
checked with loose bolts. If the chocks are
in position and correctly fitted, the bolts
should be taken out for inspection of
threads and contact faces.
Cast Iron Supporting Chocks
2. The supporting chocks shall be so adapted

that a 5/100 mm feeler gauge cannot enter
at more than 5 per cent of the entire
circumference. Whether the chocks are in
position can, when the respective bolts
have been loosened, be checked by gently
tapping on the chocks with a hook iron.
When a loose chock has been moved into

position, the fitting of the adjacent chocks
shall be checked with a feeler gauge.
If several chocks positioned next to each

other have worked loose, crankshaft
deflection readings must be taken after the
chocks have been refitted.
C 4X-30940
Checking
Side Chocks and Side Chock Liners 3.
3. After fitting the liners to an 80 per cent

contact area on both sides of the liners,
knock the liners a further 3 to 4 mm
inwards.
The liners located in way of each main

bearing on either side of the engine must
be fitted and knocked into position
simultaneously.
The first time the ship is sailing in a fully-
GN912-2.1 203 03
loaded condition after the engine has been
operating for 1,000 hours, all side chocks
should be checked to see whether the
liners can be knocked further inward.
The fit of the side chock liners should be

checked with a feeler gauge each time the
loosening pressure of the holding down
bolts is checked, and thus at the same time
intervals.
The feeler gauge is applied at the 7 points

indicated on drawing No. 782226-2, and the
measurements found are entered in the
relevant table. These results are used to
determine whether refitting or, possibly,
replacement of the liners is necessary.
If the measurements at 3 points or more have

increased 5/100 mm or more from the initial
results, we recommend that the following
procedure is followed:
1. Loosen the hexagon screws.
2. Try to knock the liner further inward.
3. Measure again at the 7 points indicated on

drawing No. 782226-2.
If this procedure does not improve the situation,

the liner must be removed, and it must be
checked that the actual contact area is more
than 80 per cent of the possible contact surface
areas on both sides of the liner.
The liners are secured in their correct position

by means of hexagon socket set screws with
cup point.
C 4X-30940
engine
Portside Cylinder Starboardside engine
bolt no. bolt no.
frame no. no. frame no.
pressure % dev. remarks pressure % dev. remarks
782225-0
1 1
2 2
1 3 3
1
4 4
1
1 1
2 2
2 3 3
2
4 4
1
2 1
2 2
3 3 3
3
4 4
1
3 1
2 2
4 3 3
4
4 4
Engine Builder :
1 1
Main engine :
2 2
5 3 3
5
Name :
4 4
1 1
2 2
6 3 3
6
4 4
* broken bolt.
1 1
2 2
7 3 3
7
in harbour
4 4
at sea
1 1
+ Bolt too long (insufficient space for turning off the jack after control)
2 2
8 3 3
8
4 4
Yard number :
1 1
2 2
9 3 3
9
/ bolt not controlled
4 4
1 1
2 2
10 3 3
10
4 4
1 1
2 2
11 3 3
11
4 4
1 1
Place for control :
Data for control :
2 2
Name of ship :
12 3 3
12
4 4
1 1
2 2
13 13
x Damaged thread
3 3
4 4
1 1
2 2
14 3 3
14
4 4
1 1
1
TEGN. d. BLAD No.
Control of hydraulically tightened
KONTR. d. TEGN No.
holding down bolts K-MC(E) engines
GODK. d. 782225-0
4X-30940
PORTSIDE STARBORDSIDE
CHOCK
POINT POINT CHOCK
CYLINDER
No No
A B c d e f g No. A B c d e f g
1 1
1
2 2
2
3 3
3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
A, B FORE A A, B
A
c
d
c
e
e
g
g
B
B
f
c, d, e, f, g c, d, e, f, g
PRES- DEVIA- POINT POINT PRES- DEVIA-
CH. BOLT SURE SURE BOLT CH.
TION TION
No No MPa MPa No No
(bar) % a b c d e a b c d e (bar) %
1 1
E E
2 2
b c d d c b
a e e a
CONTACT FACE No. 1
No.2 No.2
B1
B1
B2
B2
AFT
NAME OF SHIP : YARD NUMBER : MAIN ENGINE :
PLACE FOR CONTROL : IN HARBOUR : ENGINE BUILDER :
DATA FOR CONTROL : AT SEA : NAME :
TEGN. d. BLAD No.

COTROL OF SIDECHOCK AND OF END-
KONTR. d. TEGN No.
CHOCKS WITH BOLTS, K-MC(E) ENGINES
GODK. d. 782226-2
4X-30940
S60MC-C Holding Down and End Chock Bolts 112-2
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
02
112-2 Holding Down and End Chock Bolts
Stopped engine Risk of high pressure oil 1x3m

Block the starting mechanism Protectors to be worn 2 x 1.5 m
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil
Data

holding down bolts 150 MPa
(1500 bar)

end chock bolts 150 MPa
(1500 bar)
D-3 Increased tightening pressure

(only for initial tightening of
end chock bolts) 165 MPa
(1650 bar)
D-4 Check holding down bolts

and end chock bolts for
correct tightening after the
following service hours:
1st check 500 hours

2nd check 1000 hours
3rd check 2000 hours
Subsequently at
intervals of 8000 hours
Engine on Epoxy supporting chocks
C 4X-30940
112-2 Holding Down and End Chock Bolts S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-30940
Checking
Holding Down and End Chock Bolts
S60MC-C
203
Checking
912-2.1
Note!
The hydraulic jack used for tightening the

holding down bolts is marked with:
For: Holding down bolts
The larger jack used for tightening the

end chock bolts is marked with:
For: End chock bolts
Hydraulic tightening of holding down bolts and

end chock bolts is carried out as detailed in
section 913-1. The normal tightening pressure
is indicated on the data sheet and is also
stamped on the tightening tool.
For the initial tightening of the end chock bolts,

raise the pump pressure to the value indicated
on the data sheet. Then tighten the nut firmly
and relieve the hydraulic tool completely of
pressure. After about two minutes, raise the
pressure again until the nut can be loosened.
Now adjust the pressure to the normal
tightening pressure indicated, tighten the nut
firmly, and relieve the system of pressure.
For the initial tightening of end chock bolts, the

following alternative procedure can be
followed:
Tighten the bolts to the increased pressures

stated on the data sheet and leave the bolts so
tightened till after the sea trials, following which
they are to be retightened to the normal value
indicated on the data sheet and on the
hydraulic tightening tool.
C 4X-30940
912-2.1 Holding Down and End Chock Bolts S60MC-C
Checking
1. Checking the Bolt Tightening
1. The holding down bolts and end chock bolts

must be checked for correct tightness at the
intervals indicated on the data sheet.
For this purpose, raise the pressure on the

hydraulic tool slowly while constantly
attempting to loosen the nut with the tommy
bar. The oil pressure indicated on the
pressure gauge when the nut comes loose
(‘loosening pressure') is to be noted down
in the checking table, see drawing Nos.
782225-0 and 782226-2, following which
the bolts are tightened to the normal
tightening pressure.
The condition of the bolted joints, and thus

GN912-2.1 203 01
the general condition of the foundation, can

be effectively checked by comparing the
tables from successive bolt checks.
If the ‘loosening pressure' is below 80 per

cent of the tightening pressure, the relative
chocks shall always be checked for
possible defects. If the chocks are in
position and in order, the bolts should be
taken out for inspection of threads and
contact faces.
Checking of Epoxy Supporting Chocks
2. If a number of measuring pins have been

welded to the tanktop, the heights of the
epoxy supporting chocks are to be checked
immediately after finishing the checking of
the loosening pressures of the holding
down bolts and the retightening of these.
The distance between the measuring pins

and the bedplate is to be measured with a
blade gauge and noted down. Any possible
settling of the chocks during the intervals
between measurements can thereby be
followed.
C 4X-30940
Checking
Side Chocks and Side Chock Liners 3.
3. After fitting the liners to an 80 per cent

contact area on both sides of the liners,
knock the liners a further 3 to 4 mm
inwards.
The liners located in way of each main

bearing on either side of the engine must
be fitted and knocked into position
simultaneously.
The first time the ship is sailing in a fully-

loaded condition after the engine has been
operating for 1,000 hours, all side chocks
should be checked to see whether the
GN912-2.1 203 03
liners can be knocked further inward.
The fit of the side chock liners should be

checked with a feeler gauge each time the
loosening pressure of the holding down
bolts is checked, and thus at the same time
intervals.
The feeler gauge is applied at the 7 points

indicated on drawing No. 782226-2, and the
measurements found are to be entered in
the relevant table. These results are used
to determine whether refitting or, possibly,
replacement of the liners is necessary.
If the measurements at 3 points or more have

increased 5/100 mm or more from the initial
results, we recommend that the following
procedure is followed:
1. Loosen the hexagon screws.
2. Try to knock the liner further inward.
3. Measure again at the 7 points indicated on

drawing No. 782226-2.
If this procedure does not improve the situation,

the liner must be removed, and it must be
checked that the actual contact area is more
than 80 per cent of the possible contact surface
areas on both sides of the liner.
The liners are secured in their correct position

by means of hexagon socket set screws with
cup point.
C 4X-30940
engine
Portside Cylinder Starboardside engine
bolt no. bolt no.
frame no. no. frame no.
pressure % dev. remarks pressure % dev. remarks
782225-0
1 1
2 2
1 3 3
1
4 4
1
1 1
2 2
2 3 3
2
4 4
1
2 1
2 2
3 3 3
3
4 4
1
3 1
2 2
4 3 3
4
4 4
Engine Builder :
1 1
Main engine :
2 2
5 3 3
5
Name :
4 4
1 1
2 2
6 3 3
6
4 4
* broken bolt.
1 1
2 2
7 3 3
7
in harbour
4 4
at sea
1 1
+ Bolt too long (insufficient space for turning off the jack after control)
2 2
8 3 3
8
4 4
Yard number :
1 1
2 2
9 3 3
9
/ bolt not controlled
4 4
1 1
2 2
10 3 3
10
4 4
1 1
2 2
11 3 3
11
4 4
1 1
Place for control :
Data for control :
2 2
Name of ship :
12 3 3
12
4 4
1 1
2 2
13 13
x Damaged thread
3 3
4 4
1 1
2 2
14 3 3
14
4 4
1 1
1
TEGN. d. BLAD No.
Control of hydraulically tightened
KONTR. d. TEGN No.
holding down bolts K-MC(E) engines
GODK. d. 782225-0
4X-30940
CHOCK
POINT POINT CHOCK
CYLINDER
No No
A B c d e f g No. A B c d e f g
1 1
1
2 2
2
3 3
3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
A, B FORE A A, B
A
c
d
c
e
e
g
g
B
B
f
c, d, e, f, g c, d, e, f, g
PRES- DEVIA- POINT POINT PRES- DEVIA-
CH. BOLT SURE SURE BOLT CH.
TION TION
No No MPa MPa No No
(bar) % a b c d e a b c d e (bar) %
1 1
E E
2 2
b c d d c b
a e e a
CONTACT FACE No. 1
No.2 No.2
B1
B1
B2
B2
AFT
NAME OF SHIP : YARD NUMBER : MAIN ENGINE :
PLACE FOR CONTROL : IN HARBOUR : ENGINE BUILDER :
DATA FOR CONTROL : AT SEA : NAME :
TEGN. d. BLAD No.

COTROL OF SIDECHOCK AND OF END-
KONTR. d. TEGN No.
CHOCKS WITH BOLTS, K-MC(E) ENGINES
GODK. d. 782226-2
4X-30940
S60MC-C Stay Bolts 112-3
Data
Special Data
S60MC-C
02
112-3 Stay Bolts
X Block the starting mechanism Protectors to be worn
Engage turning gear
Shut off fuel oil 1x3m

2 x 1.5 m
Data

– dismantling 150-165 MPa
(1500-1650 bar)
– tightening 150 MPa
(1500 bar)
C 4X-30940
112-3 Stay Bolts S60MC-C
Data
C 4X-30940
S60MC-C Stay Bolts 912-3.1
Checking
Stay Bolts
S60MC-C
203
Checking
912-3.1
1.
1. Before retightening the stay bolts, remove
the protective caps.
2. Retighten the stay bolts in pairs, working

from fore to aft of the engine.
3. Clean the contact faces and mount the

hydraulic tools on a pair of stay bolts
positioned opposite each other.
GN912-3.1 202 01
Connect the high-pressure pump by means
of the high-pressure hoses, so that the two
stay bolts are tightened in one operation.
2.
GN912-3.1 202 03
3.
GN912-3.1 202 02
C 4X-30940
912-3.1 Stay Bolts S60MC-C
Checking
4. 4. Maintain the hydraulic pressure at the value

indicated in D-1, and retighten the stay bolt
nuts with a tommy bar. Before relieving the
system of pressure, check with a feeler
gauge that the nuts bear against the
contact face.
5. When all stay bolts have been retightened,

reconnect the hydraulic tools to the pair of
stay bolts first tightened. Tighten to 10%
below D-1 and check if the nut is loose.
If the nut is not loose:

Tighten the stay bolts to D-1.
HM912-3.0 28 04
If the nut is loose:

Tighten all stay bolts once again to D-1.
5. 6. After completing the retightening

procedure, mount the protective caps.
HM912-3.0 28 05
6.
GN912-3.1 202 06
C 4X-30940
S60MC-C Crankcase Oil Outlet 112-5
Data
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION FOR SAFETY Standard Tools:

Special Data
S60MC-C
0000
112-5 Crankcase Oil Outlet
X Stopped engine
Shut off fuel oil
Data
4X-30940
112-5 Crankcase Oil Outlet S60MC-C
Data
4X-30940
S60MC-C Crankcase Oil Outlet 912-5.1
Checking
Crankcase Oil Outlet
S60MC-C
0201M
Checking
912-5.1
1.
The crankcase oil outlets guide the lubricating oil
from the crankcase to the lubricating oil bottom tank.
The sealings of the crankcase oil outlets must be
checked at regular intervals, for example during
dockings. The crankcase oil outlets may be
equipped with either rubber diaphragm sealing or
E F G D C B A
metal bellow sealing.
Note!
If the water content of the main engine lube

oil is rising, this may indicate that the crank-
case oil outlet sealings are fractured.
M91205-0201C01
Rubber diaphrabm sealing
1. To access the rubber diaphragm sealing

remove:
Screw A
Grating B 2.
Screws C
Cover plate D
Screws E
Steel ring F.
2. Lift away the rubber sealing diaphragms G and

examine each diaphragm closely. In case of any
rips or tears in the diaphragms, they must be re-
placed.
Note!
It is srtongly recommended ro always replace

M91205-0201C02
the diaphragms during inspection. If unavail-

able, new diaphragm may be made from
three layers of 2 mm thick oil and tempera-
ture resistant rubber.
3. Mount:
Rubber sealing diaphragms G
Steel ring F
Screw E
Cover plate D
Screws C
Grating B
Screws A
Note!
Remember to fit new locking plates at screws

A.
4X-30940
912-5.1 Crankcase Oil Outlet S60MC-C
Checking
4. Metal bellow sealing
4. Remove all screws A and grating B.
5. Remount four of the screws A at diametri-

cally opposite positions.
6. Remove:
Screws C
Cover plate D
Screws E
7. Lift away metal bellow sealing F and exam-

ine it closely. If any cracks or punctures are
M91250-0201C04
found in the metal bellow sealing, it must be

replaced.
7. Note!
It is recommended to always replace the

metal bellow sealing during inspection.
8. Replace gaskets G and H.
9. Mount metal bellow sealing F.
10. Mount:
Screws E
Cover plate D
Screws C
M91205-0201C07
11. Remove the four screws A.
12. Mount grating B.
13. Mount all screws A.
4X-30940
S60MC-C Large Parts - Tools Plate 91261-0054M
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure P91261 Edition 0054M
C 4X-30940
Plate 91261-0054M Large Parts - Tools
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
023 O-ring with back-up ring, 12A03
90/100 mm
035 O-ring with back-up ring, 12A03
120/130 mm
072 Hydarulic tools for stay bolts -
C 4X-30940
S60MC-C Hydraulic Tools for Holding-Down Bolts Plate 91263-0049M
and End Chock Bolts (Epoxy)
C 4X-30940
Plate 91263-0049M Hydraulic Tools for Holding-Down Bolts
and End Chock Bolts (Epoxy)
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
097 O-ring with back-up ring, (24B03)

120/130 mm*)
107 O-ring with back-up ring, (24B02)
90/100 mm*)
119 Spacer ring*) (24B02)
120 Hydraulic jack for end chock (24B01)
bolts, M64x6*)
144 Hydraulic jack for end chock -
bolts, complete
*)Optional extras
C 4X-30940
S60MC-C Hydraulic Tools for Holding-Down Bolts Plate 91263-0050M
and End Chock Bolts (Cast Iron Chock)
C 4X-30940
Plate 91263-0050M Hydraulic Tools for Holding-Down Bolts
and End Chock Bolts (Cast Iron Chock)
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
097 O-ring with back-up ring, (25A03)

120/130 mm*)
107 O-ring with back-up ring, (25A03)
90/100 mm*)
119 Spacer ring*) (25A02)
120 Hydraulic jack, M64x6*) (25A01)
144 Hydraulic tools for holding-down -
bolts and end chock bolts,
complete*)
*)Optional extras
C 4X-30940
INDEX
CYLINDER COVER
CYLINDER LINER AND


AND TURNING GEAR
STARTING AIR SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GENERAL TOOLS
INDEX
GENERAL TOOLS
GRINDING MACHINE FOR EXHAUST VALVE
TEST DEVICE FOR FUEL INJECTION VALVE
HYDRAULIC PUMP
INSTRUCTION FOR USE OF ENGINE INDICATOR

MITSUI ENGINEERING & SHIPBUILDING CO.,LTD.
913 GENERAL TOOLS
GENERAL TOOLS
S60MC-C Hydraulic Tools 913-1
Hydraulic Tools
S60MC-C
203
A. Snap-on coupling
913-1
1.
B. Tool attachment thread
C. Bleed screw
D. Piston
E. Cylinder
F. Seal rings
G. Spacer ring
H. Tommy bar
I. Nut
J. Stud or bolt
K. Extension stud
L. Lifting tool
S. Clearance
U. Milled recess for feeler gauge
Studs or bolts provided with threads for attach-
ing hydraulic tools and with circular nuts must
GN913-1 203 01
only be loosened and tightened up by means of
the hydraulic tools supplied.
The jack(s) is/are connected, via a distributor
block, to a high-pressure pump, which is set to
deliver hydraulic oil at the pressure indicated 2.
on the jack and on the data sheet in the rele-
vant section of this instruction book. The stud
or bolt concerned is thereby lengthened relative
to the oil pressure applied and the piston area,
and the nut can be loosened or tightened, as
required, with the aid of a tommy bar.
Note!
The both couplings fitted on end of high-

pressure hose must be used with con-
necting the nipples.
Never use the high-pressure hose which
coupling is disconnected with nipple at
one side.
The jacks must never be overloaded or ex-

posed to blows or impacts. They are marked
with a “Max. lift”, which must not be exceeded.
1. The hydraulic tools, except those for the
main bearings, consist of a jack with an in-
GN913-1 203 02
ternal thread to suit the tool attachment

thread on the stud or bolt, and a spacer ring
which is to be placed under the jack and
around the nut that is to be loosened or
tightened.
2. For the main bearings, the hydraulic tool
consists of a double jack with two extension
studs. This jack is designed for the simul-
taneous dismantling of both nuts on one
side of the main bearing.
4E-92651
913-1 Hydraulic Tools S60MC-C
3. 3. The hydraulic jacks are so designed that, in

the event that the “Max. lift” limit is exceed-
ed, the pressure is relieved at the bottom of
the pressure chamber and the oil will be
pressed out into the space between the
stud and the spacer ring.
When the pressure is relieved in this way,

the lowermost seal ring will in most cases
be damaged. Therefore inspect and, if nec-
essary, replace this seal ring.
The oil used must be pure hydraulic oil or

turbine oil (with a viscosity of about SAE
20). Oils such as, for instance, lubricating
oil (system oil) or cylinder lubricating oil
must not be used, as these oils are normal-
ly alkaline and can thus damage the back-
up rings (seal rings).
The following instructions must be closely

followed to prevent accidents or damage,
and after use the jacks should be cleaned
GN913-1 203 03
and kept in the wooden boxes supplied.
Warning!
Eye protectors and gloves must be used

when using hydraulic tools.
4E-92651
Loosening of Nut
Loosening of Nut
913-1
Single Hydraulic Jack 1.
1. Carefully clean the tool attachment thread,

the nut and the surrounding parts.
Grease the tool attachment thread with

molybdenum disulphide grease or with
graphite and oil or similar.
Place the spacer ring around the nut in

such a position that the tommy bar can be
applied through the slot when the nut is to
be loosened.
2. Screw the jack on to the tool attachment

thread of the bolt/stud, until the cylinder of
the jack bears firmly against the spacer
ring.
Connect the hydraulic jack, the distributor

block and the high pressure pump by
means of high pressure hoses.
GN913-1 203 04
Unscrew the jack to create a clearance

between the jack and spacer ring. See
sketch.
Loosen the bleed screw in the jack and fill 2.

up the system with oil until oil without
bubbles, flows out of the bleed hole. Then
tighten the bleed screw again.
When loosening nuts on very long bolts

(e.g. staybolts) it is recommended to
unscrew the jack an additional half turn.
The clearance between the jack and spacer

ring ensures dismantling of the jack after
loosening the nut.
H Hydraulic
pump
After adjustment, check that the parts are
guided correctly together and that there is
no clearance between the piston and
cylinder of the jack.
GN913-1 203 05 L0a
4E-92651
Loosening of Nut
3. 3. Increase the oil pressure to the prescribed

value. If the nut does not come loose, the
pressure may be increased by approx. 15
MPa(150 bar).
4. Unscrew the nut with the tommy bar,

making sure that the nut is not screwed up
against the jack.
5. Relieve the system of pressure, disconnect

the high-pressure pump, and remove the
hydraulic tools.
GN913-1 203 06
Note!
Make sure not to exceed the “max lift”

stamped on the jack.
4.
HM913-1.1 10 04
5.
GN913-1 203 08
4E-92651
Loosening of Nut
Double Hydraulic Jack 6.
6. Carefully clean the tool attachment threads,

the main bearing studs, the nuts and the
surrounding parts.
Grease the tool attachment threads with

molybdenum disulphide grease or graphite
and oil or similar.
Mount the extension studs on the main

bearing studs.
Using the lifting tool, place the spacer ring
GN913-1 203 09
over the extension studs in such a position
that the tommy bar can be applied through
the slots for the purpose of loosening the
nuts.
8.
7. Press the pistons and the cylinder of both
the hydraulic jacks firmly together.
Mount the two jacks (one by one using the

lifting tool) over the extension studs and
land them on the spacer ring.
Make sure that both the cylinders of the

jacks and the spacer ring are guided
correctly together.
Screw the upper nuts on to the threads of

the extension studs until the cylinders of
the jacks bear firmly against each other and
against the spacer ring.
GN913-1 203 11
8. The clearance between the pistons and the

cylinder of the top jack is adjusted by
unscrewing the upper nuts 1 turn  3 mm.
The clearance between the jack and spacer

ring ensures dismounting of the jack after
loosening the nut.
Connect the hydraulic jacks, the distributor

Loosen the bleed screws in both jacks, and

fill up the system with oil until oil, without
bubbles, flows out of the bleed holes.
Re-tighten the bleed screws.
4E-92651
Loosening of Nut

value. If the nut does not come loose, the
pressure may be increased by approx. 15
MPa(150 bar).
10. Unscrew the lower nuts 1½ turns with the

tommy bar, making sure that the nuts are
not screwed up against the extension stud.

the high-pressure pump, and remove the
hydraulic tools.
GN913-1 203 12
Note!
Make sure not to exceed the “max lift”

stamped on the jack.
4E-92651
Tightening of Nut
Tightening of Nut
913-1
Single Hydraulic Jack 1.
1. Thoroughly clean the nut, the thread, the

contact faces, and the surrounding parts.
Clean and lubricate the tool attachment

thread and the thread in the nut with
graphite and oil or similar.
Fit the round nut on the thread and tighten

it with the tommy bar.
Check with a feeler gauge that the contact

face of the nut bears on the entire
circumference.
Place the spacer ring around the nut in

such a position that the tommy bar can be
applied through the slot for the purpose of
tightening the nut.
2. Press the piston and the cylinder of the jack

GN913-1 203 04
firmly together.
Screw the hydraulic jack on to the tool

attachment thread.
2.
Make sure that the cylinder of the jack
bears firmly against the spacer ring and
that the parts are guided correctly together
Connect the hydraulic jack, the distributor

block and the high-pressure pump by
means of high-pressure hoses.
Loosen the bleed screw in the jack and fill

up the system with oil, until oil without
bubbles flows out of the bleed hole.
Hydraulic
pump
Re-tighten the bleed screw.
GN913-1 203 05 L0a
4E-92651
Tightening of Nut

value, and tighten the nut by means of the
tommy bar applied through the slot of the
spacer ring.
4. While maintaining the pressure, check with

a feeler gauge introduced through the
recess at the bottom of the spacer ring that
the nut bears against the contact face.

the pump, and remove the hydraulic jack.
6. When new studs, bolts or nuts are

tightened for the first time, do not remove
the jacks, but loosen the nut as described
GN913-1 203 17
under ‘Loosening’, points 6-7-8, and then

tighten the nut again according to the
procedure under ‘Tightening', points 3-4-5.
4.
GN913-1 203 18
4E-92651
Tightening of Nut
Double Hydraulic Jack 7.
7. Thoroughly clean the nuts, the threads on

the main bearing studs, the contact faces,
and the surrounding parts.
Clean and lubricate the tool attachment

thread and the threads in the nuts with
graphite and oil.
Fit the round nuts on the threads and

tighten them with the tommy bar.
Check with a feeler gauge that the contact
JG913-1.2 20 07
faces of the nuts bear on the entire
circumference.
Mount the extension studs on the main

bearing studs.
8.
Using the lifting tool, place the spacer ring
over the extension studs in such a position
that the tommy bar can be applied through
the slots for the purpose of tightening the
nuts.
8. Press the piston and the cylinder of both

the hydraulic jacks firmly together.
Mount the two jacks (one by one using the

lifting tool) over the extension studs and
land them on the spacer ring.
GN913-1 203 22L0a
Make sure that both the cylinders of the

jacks and the spacer ring are guided
correctly together.
Screw the upper nuts on to the threads of

9.
the extension studs until the cylinders of
the jacks bear firmly against each other and
against the spacer ring.
9. Connect the hydraulic jacks, the distributor

Loosen the bleed screws in both jacks, and

fill up the system with oil until oil, without
bubbles, flows out of the bleed holes.
GN913-1 203 23
Re-tighten the bleed screws.
4E-92651
Tightening of Nut

value, and tighten the nuts by means of the
tommy bar applied through the slots of the
spacer ring.
11. While maintaining the pressure, check with

a feeler gauge introduced through the
recesses at the bottom of the spacer ring
that the nuts bear against the contact face.

the pump, and remove the hydraulic tools.
13. When new studs, bolts or nuts are

GN913-1 203 24
tightened for the first time, do not remove

the jacks, but loosen the nuts as described
under ‘Loosening', points 9-10-11, and then
tighten the nuts again according to the
11. procedure under ‘Tightening', points 10-11-
12.
GN913-1 203 25
4E-92651
Maintenance
Maintenance
913-1
1. The hydraulic jacks require no maintenance 1.

except replacement of defective sealing
rings, each of which consists of an O-ring
and a back-up ring fitted in ring grooves in
the piston and cylinder.
The piston and cylinder are easily

separated by taking out the bleed screw
and pressing the parts apart with the help
of compressed air.
Warning!

Make sure that there are no marks or

scratches on the sliding surfaces of the
parts. The presence of metal particles will
damage the sealing rings.
GN913-1 203 28
Keep the sliding surfaces and threads

coated with acid-free grease or
molybdenum disulphide grease.
2. The pistons and cylinders of the double 2.

jacks are separated in the same easy way
as described for the single jack.
GN913-1 203 29
4E-92651
Maintenance
3. 3. When changing the sealing rings, first

mount the back-up ring and then the O-ring.
Warning!
Note that the back-up ring (1) must be

away from the pressure chamber and
the O-ring (2) close to the pressure
chamber.
See the sketch for the correct mounting of

both the upper and the lower sealing rings.
The same principle applies to all the jacks.
4. After fitting the sealing rings, coat the

piston and cylinder with molybdenum
disulphide grease and press the piston and
cylinder together. See that the rings do not
get stuck between the piston and cylinder.
GN913-1 203 30
4E-92651
S60MC-C Standard Tightening Torques 913-4
Standard Tightening Torques

S60MC-C
0201
913-4
When tightening screws or nuts for which no

torque is specified in the instruction procedure
or the related data sheet, the standard torques
specified in this procedure are to be applied.
1. Standard screws and nuts lubricated with a

Molybdenum Disulphide (MoS 2) based lu-
bricant.
Thread Tightening Thread Tightening

torque torque
M8 17 Nm M22 400 Nm
M10 35 Nm M24 460 Nm
M12 50 Nm M27 610 Nm
M14 80 Nm M30 950 Nm
M16 135 Nm M33 1200 Nm
M18 190 Nm M36 1650 Nm
M20 260 Nm M39 2100 Nm
2. Self-locking nuts.

torque torque
M8 20 Nm M22 430 Nm
M10 40 Nm M24 490 Nm
M12 60 Nm M27 650 Nm
M14 90 Nm M30 1000 Nm
M16 150 Nm M33 1250 Nm
M18 210 Nm M36 1700 Nm
M20 290 Nm M39 2200 Nm
3. Screws and nuts locked with glue/Loctite.

torque torque
M8 23 Nm M22 580 Nm
M10 50 Nm M24 680 Nm
M12 70 Nm M27 900 Nm
M14 115 Nm M30 1350 Nm
M16 190 Nm M33 1700 Nm
M18 270 Nm M36 2350 Nm
M20 380 Nm M39 3000 Nm
4E-92651
913-4 Standard Tightening Torques S60MC-C
4. 4. Screwing-in of studs.
Screwing-in torque curve
The intention of this procedure is to ensure
that the studs are screwed right to the bot-
tom of the threaded holes.
Torque (Nm)
Carefully clean off any burrs and loose

particles from the thread and contact faces,
and coat the thread with a lubricant having
a particle size of approx. 0.5 um, for
instance MoS 2 (molybdenum disulphide) or
a non-synthetic graphite mixed with oil.
M91304-0202C04
The studs are to be screwed-in applying the

Major diameter of thread (mm) torque specified in the instruction proce-
dure in use. If nothing is mentioned in the
instructon procedure, Fig.4 indicates the
torque. For thread sizes ≧ M36 the curve
indicates a screwing-in torque of 680 Nm.
5. Screws and nuts locked with camlock

washers.
For correct fitting of washers, see Proce-

dure 913-7.

torque torque
M8 20 Nm M22 470 Nm
M10 40 Nm M24 550 Nm
M12 70 Nm M27 800 Nm
M14 110 Nm M30 1100 Nm
M16 165 Nm M33 1500 Nm
M18 230 Nm M36 1900 Nm
M20 320 Nm M39 2500 Nm
4E-92651
S60MC-C Torque Spanner 913-5
Torque Spanner
S60MC-C
203
913-5
Before screwing the nuts on, the threads and

the contact faces should be greased with a
mixture of graphite and oil or molybdenum
disulphide with a friction coefficient µ = 0.1-0.12
(e.g. MOLYKOTE paste type G).
The nuts should fit easily on the thread, and it

should be checked that they bear on the entire
contact face.
In the case of new nuts and studs, the nuts are

to be tightened and loosened two or three times
so that the thread may assume its definite
shape; thus obviating the risk of loose nuts.
Nuts secured with a split pin are to be tightened

to the stated torque and then to the next split-
pin hole.
The torque spanner must not be used for

torques higher than those stamped on it, and it
must not be damaged by hammering on it or the
like.
4E-92651
S60MC-C Tightening Gauge 913-6
Tightening Gauge
S60MC-C
203
913-6
Preparations
Before screwing on the nuts, grease the

threads and the contact faces with a mixture of
graphite and oil or molybdenum disulphide with
a friction coefficient.
µ = 0.1–0.12 (e.g. MOLYKOTE paste type G)
The nuts should fit easily on the thread, and it

should be checked that they bear on the entire
contact face.
Pre-tightening with a torque spanner
Before tightening the nuts according to a

tightening gauge or tightening angle, they must
be pre-tightened with a torque spanner.
Apply a pre-tightening torque of:

– thread  M20: 50 Nm,
– thread > M20: 100 Nm
This is in order to ensure a uniform basis for the

subsequent tightening with gauge or tightening
angle.
Tightening with a tightening gauge
After pre-tightening, place the tightening gauge

round the nut, and mark off with chalk on the
nut at slot A on the tightening gauge, and make
another chalk mark on the contact face at slot
B. Then tighten the nut until the two chalk
marks coincide.
Tightening without a tightening gauge
For tightening angles of e.g. 30°–45° and 60°,

we usually do not deliver a tightening gauge.
Therefore, after pre-tightening, mark the angle

on a corner of the nut and on the contact face,
respectively. Then tighten the nut until the two
HM913-6.0 04 01 and XT913-6.04
marks coincide.
When tightening new studs or bolts for the first

time, loosen again and repeat the procedure –
including pre-tightening with a torque spanner,
to allow the parts to settle.
4E-92651
S60MC-C Screws and Nuts 913-7
Locking
Screws and Nuts
S60MC-C
204
Locking
913-7
1.
Some screwed and bolted connections on the
engine, as well as some movable joints, are
secured against untimely loosening by means
of different types of locking devices.
When reassembling the engine after overhauls,

it is vital that all such screws and nuts are again
locked correctly.
Note!
Make sure only to mount locking devices
HM913-7.1 03 01
on nuts and screws which have been
mounted with locking devices by the
engine manufacturer.
1. Lock washers, tab washers, locking 2.

plates, etc., must always be replaced. The
tab-like projections, etc., on the washers
are to be bent back over one of the flats of
the screw or nut concerned.
HM913-7.1 03 02
2. Used spring washers must be replaced.
3. Self-locking nuts may only be used five

times. Therefore, give the nut a centre
3.
punch mark each time it is loosened.
To tighten a self-locking nut to a specific

torque, first measure the torque required to
turn the nut itself, and then add this torque
HM913-7.1 03 03
to the torque value stated on the data sheet

of a procedure.
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 913-7 Edition 204Ma Page 1 (4)
4E-92651
913-7 Screws and Nuts S60MC-C
Locking
Locking wire should be fitted after the screws

or nuts have been tightened to the correct
torque. Do not overtighten or loosen the units
to get a correct alignment of the wire holes.
Always fit new wire after tightening-up the
units.
Any tendency of the screws or nuts to loosen

will be counteracted by a tightening of the
locking wire. Do not secure more than four units
in a series, unless otherwise specified.
Fig. 1: Insert wire, grasp the upper end of the

wire and bend it around the head of the screw,
then under the other end of the wire, be sure
that the wire is tight around the head.
Fig. 2: Twist the wire clockwise until it is just

short of the hole in the second screw. Keeping
the wire under tension, twist it until tight. When
the wire is tight, the wire shall have
approximately 7-10 twists per 25 mm. One twist
is a twist of the wires through an arc of 180°,
equal to half of a complete turn.
Fig. 3: Insert the uppermost wire in the second

HM913-7.2 03 01
screw, and pull it tight.
Fig. 4: Bend the lower wire around the screw,

and under the end protruding from the screw.
Fig. 5: Keeping the wire under tension, twist it

min. 3 twists, counterclockwise until tight.
Fig. 6: During the final twisting motion, bend

the wire along the screw head. Cut off excess
wire.
Fig. 7-9: Show the preferred ways of mounting

the locking wire on screws with wire holes
oriented in different angles.
HM913-7.2 03 02
Page 2 (4) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 913-7 Edition 204Ma
4E-92651
S60MC-C Screws and Nuts 913-7
Locking
Fig. 10: Shows how to route the locking wire on

screws in different planes.
Fig. 11: Wire that passes over the top of a nut

is an acceptable alternative only if it routes
around the protruding screw thread.
Fig. 12: Wire that passes over the top of a nut

is also an acceptable alternative if the hole is
located as shown in the figure.
Fig. 13: Where drilling of locking wire holes has

caused a thin wall section, route the wire as
shown in the figure, to prevent damage to the
nut.
Fig. 14: Locking wire can be mounted to any

other part of the assembly if nothing else is
possible. HM913-7.2 03 03
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 913-7 Edition 204Ma Page 3 (4)
4E-92651
913-7 Screws and Nuts S60MC-C
Locking
Fig. 15 Cam Lock Washers with rising cams on one

side and radial teeth on the other.
Fig. 15: The washers are installed in pairs, cam

face to cam face. When the bolt and/or nut is
tightened the teeth grip and seat the mating
surfaces. The cam lock washer is locked in
place, allowing movement only across the face
of the cams. Any attempt from the bolt/nut to
rotate loose is blocked by the wedge effect of
the cams.
Fig. 16: Different uses of the cam lock wash-

ers.
M913-7 0207 15
Fig. 17: Don not use the cam lock washers in

conjunction with other loose washers.
Fig. 16
Note!
Cam lock washers must be installed in

pairs and are not to be substituted by
other types of washers.
M913-7 0207 16
Fig. 17
M913-7 0207 17
Page 4 (4) When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 913-7 Edition 204Ma
4E-92651
S60MC-C Lubricating Procedures 913-11
Lubricating Procedures
S60MC-C
203
913-11
Molybdenum Disulphide (MoS2)
The following procedure is to be followed prior

to the mounting of metal surfaced parts which
are to function as seals.
• Clean the surface with a cleaning fluid

and ensure that the entire surface is
completely free of grease.
• Allow 5 minutes for the cleaning fluid to

evaporate.
• With a clean leathercloth, and using

circular movements, rub a mixture of
fine-grained particles of Molybdenum
Disulphide (MoS2) and mineral oil (e.g.
Molycote G-n Plus, or the like) hard onto
the metal surface.
• Remove any excessive paste and ensure

that the metal surface is only coated with
a thin, uniform, layer of the above
mixture.
• Protect the wet paste and cloth from dust

or other foreign particles.
4E-92651
S60MC-C Accessories for Hydraulic Tools Plate 91351-22M
When referring to this page, please quote Procedure 91351 Edition 22M
C 4E-92651
Plate 91351-22M Accessories for Hydraulic Tools
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
010 Flexible high-pressure 13A10
hose (1.5 m), complete
022 Flexible high-pressure 13A09
hose (3 m), complete
034 Flexible high-pressure (13A08)
hose (5 m), complete*)
046 3-way distributing piece, 13A04
complete
complete
083 Flexible high-pressure hose (13A10)
095 Flexible high-pressure hose (13A09)
105 Flexible high-pressure hose*) (13A08)
117 Gasket -
129 Snap-on coupling, female -
with protective plug
142 Screwed connection 90 13A03
178 Distributing piece with needle (13A07)
valve *)
201 3-way distributing piece (13A04)
237 Wrench 13A95
249 Bleeder screw (13A03)
250 Snap-on coupling, male (13A03)
with protective cap
262 Manual high-pressure pump 13A02
274 Pneumatic/hydraulic 13A01
high-pressure pump
321 Tommy bar, 4.5 mm 13A95
333 Tommy bar, 7 mm 13A95
345 Tommy bar, 9 mm 13A95
382 Gasket, 10 mm brass 13A03
complete
*) Optional extras
C 4E-92651
S60MC-C Lifting Tools, Etc. Plate 91356-40M
13A20 Thread Max. load B&W Standard No.

M10 2.3 kN - 230 kg EN69R 10
M12 3.4 kN - 340 kg EN69R 12
M16 7.0 kN - 700 kg EN69R 16
M20 12.0 kN - 1200 kg EN69R 20
M24 18.0 kN - 1800 kg EN69R 24
M30 36.0 kN - 3600 kg EN69R 30
M36 51.0 kN - 5100 kg EN69R 36
13A19 Thread Max. load B&W Standard No.

M12 9.0 kN - 900 kg (EN518G 12)
M16 15.0 kN - 1500 kg (EN518G 16)
M20 24.0 kN - 2400 kg (EN518G 20)
M24 37.0 kN - 3700 kg (EN518G 24)
M30 60.0 kN - 6000 kg (EN518G 30)
13A18 Length Max. load Item No.

6.0 m 58.0 kN - 5800 kg -
13A21 Thread Max. load

M10
13A53 Length Item No.

970 x 250 mm -
C 4E-92651
S60MC-C Spanners Plate 91361-38M
Combination spanner
13A81 Size MAN B&W Standard No. Size MAN B&W Standard No.
10 EN554K 10 19 EN554K 19
11 EN554K 11 21 EN554K 21
12 EN554K 12 22 EN554K 22
13 EN554K 13 24 EN554K 24
14 EN554K 14 27 EN554K 27
16 EN554K 16 30 EN554K 30
17 EN554K 17 32 EN554K 32
18 EN554K 18 36 EN554K 36
Double open-ended spanner

6-7 EN552F 67 24 - 27 EN552F 2427
8 - 10 EN552F 810 30 - 32 EN552F 3032
12 - 14 EN552F 1214 36 - 41 EN552F 3641
13 - 17 EN552F 1317 46 - 50 EN552F 4650
16 - 18 EN552F 1618 55 - 60 EN552F 5560
19 - 22 EN552F 1922
Single-ended spanner
65 EN551F 65 80 EN551F 80
70 EN551F 70 85 EN551F 85
75 EN551F 75 95 EN551F 95
C 4E-92651
Ring impact spanner

30 EN554L 30 60 EN554L 60
32 EN554L 32 65 EN554L 65
36 EN554L 36 70 EN554L 70
41 EN554L 41 75 EN554L 75
46 EN554L 46 80 EN554L 80
50 EN554L 50 85 EN554L 85
55 EN554L 55 95 EN554L 95
Open-ended impact spanner

30 EN553E 30 60 EN553E 60
32 EN553E 32 65 EN553E 65
36 EN553E 36 70 EN553E 70
41 EN553E 41 75 EN553E 75
46 EN553E 46 80 EN553E 80
50 EN553E 50 85 EN553E 85
55 EN553E 55 95 EN553E 95
C 4E-92651
13A86 13A87
B&W Standard No. B&W Standard No.
Dasignation Small set Large set
Complete EN563H1 EN563H2
Ratchet EN506B 12,5 EN506B 20,0
Slide T - handle EN506A 12,5 EN506A 20,0
Universal joint EN506P 12,5 EN506P 20,0
Extension EN506F 12,5125 EN506F 20,0200
Extension EN506F 12,5250 EN506F 20,0400
Socket EN506L 10 EN506L 24
Socket for internal hexagon EN506G 5 EN506G 14
Socket for internal hexagon EN506G 8
Box EN563G 1 EN563G 2
Reducing adapter 凹 12,7 凸 19
Reducing adapter 凹 25,4 凸 19
13A88 Socket wrench set for internal hexagon B&W Standard No.
Size-------------------------Complete EN549G 1
17 mm EN549A 7
12 mm EN549A 12
14 mm EN549A 14
17 mm EN549A 17
19 mm EN549A 19
13A88 Socket wrench set for internal hexagon B&W Standard No.
Size-------------------------Complete EN549E 1
1.5 mm EN549A 1,5
1.2 mm EN549A 2
2.5 mm EN549A 2,5
1.3 mm EN549A 3
1.4 mm EN549A 4
1.5 mm EN549A 5
1.6 mm EN549A 6
1.8 mm EN549A 8
.10 mm EN549A 10
C 4E-92651
S60MC-C Spanners, Etc. Plate 91364-50M
011
035
047
059
060
072
084
096
106
118
M1
131
143
155
M2
C 4E-92651
Plate 91364-50M Spanners, Etc.
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
011 Open spanner 13A90

035 Torque spanner 20-90 Nm 13A91
072 Pliers for circlip 4-9 13A92
M1 Pliers for circlip 82-165 13A92
M2 Pliers for circlip 82-175 13A92
C 4E-92651
S60MC-C Instruments Plate 91366-60M
048
061 M6
M7
M4
012
024 M8
M3
097
036
C 4E-92651
Plate 91366-60M Instruments
Item MES
Part Description
No. Tools No.
012 Indicator, complete 13A76

024 Crankshaft measuring tool 13A80
(Autolog), complete
036 Indicator, paper 13A77
048 Planimeter, complete *) (13A78)
061 Cylinder gauge, complete 13A79
097 Measuring tool for main 13A71
bearing clearance
M3 Greese gun 13A51
M4 Sleeper 13A52
M6 Dial gauge 13A73
M7 Holder with magnet base 13A74
M8 Feeler gauge 13A75
*) Optional extra
C 4E-92651
913 GENERAL TOOLS
GRINDING MACHINE FOR EXHAUST VALVE

913 GENERAL TOOLS
TEST DEVICE FOR FUEL INJECTION VALVE

913 GENERAL TOOLS
HYDRAULIC PUMP
913 GENERAL TOOLS
INSTRUCTION FOR USE OF ENGINE INDICATOR

Maintain Engine Plan

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Maintain Engine Plan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FINISHED PLAN

APR. ‐7. 2011

LIST No. MB-3

In view of the continued development of our diesel engines,

1. Safety sign, Signal word

It shows that no avoidance may cause death and serious injury.

It shows that no avoidance may cause slight injury.

Notice It shows caution items to avoid the damage of machinery.

2. Symbols for safety marks

a) Caution mark b) Prohibition mark

General Caution General prohibition

Inframmable Fire No smoking

Explosive Explosion Naked flames prohibited

Correosive Corrosion No touching

Poisonous Poisoning c) Duty mark

High temperture Skin burn Wear head protector - Helmet etc.

Wear hearing protector - Earplugs

Sharp Edge Cut Wear hand protector - Gloves etc.

External Wear foot protector - Safety shoes

Slipping d) The others

Falling Refer to separate paper

3. Confirmation items after overhauling,

4. Caution in case of turning the main

The lubricating in each bearing shell

DISMANTLE, REMOVE, WITHDRAW

MOUNT, CONNECT FIT

UNSCREW, LOOSEN, TURN IN DIRECTION OF ARROW

SCREW ON, TIGHTEN, TURN IN DIRECTION OF ARROW

LOOSEN - TIGHTEN WITH HYDRAULIC TOOLS

PAY ATTENTION, CHECK

INDICATES DIRECTION, SHOWS DETAIL

CLOSE VALVE, COCK

OPEN VALVE, COCK

LUBRICATE WITH PRESCRIBED LUBRICANT

The procedures are divided into three categories:

This procedure number normally refers to one of the above

Where a symbol O or C is indicated in Based on observations

V : See Vol. 1 “Operation & Data” T : Pressure test only

901 Cylinder Cover

902 Piston with Rod and Stuffing Box

-2 Piston Rod Stuffing Box C,O 902

903 Cylinder Liner and Cylinder Lubrication

-1 Cylinder Liner O 901

Measuring wear inside liner O O

Accumulator with filling up type C* C** O O 903

904 Crosshead with Connecting Rod

905 Crankshaft, Thrust Bearing and Turning Gear

-2 Main Bearing C C A,C,O 905,V

-4 Journal Bearing C C A,C,O 905,V

-5 Axial Vibration Damper C,O

V : See Vol. 1 “Operation & Data” T : Pressure test only

906 Mechanical Control Gear

-4 Camshaft Bearings C,O

Camshaft Coupling, Fitted bolts C

907 Starting Air System

-1 Starting Air Distributor C C A

-2 Starting Air Valve C,O

Governor, change of oil O M

Functional check of overspeed device C M

Functional check of speed-setting system C M

908 Exhaust Valve

Conventional exhaust valve; O O